29
Photomatix Pro User Manual Version 4.0 © 2010 HDRsoft. All rights reserved.

PhotomatixProManual

  • Upload
    jincob

  • View
    218

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 129

Photomatix Pro User Manual

Version 40

copy 2010 HDRsoft All rights reserved

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 229

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Contents

Introduction 1

1 Taking Photos for HDR 2

11 Setting up the Camera 2

12 Selecting the Exposures 3

13 Using Film-Based Cameras 3

2 Loading and Pre-Processing Images 4

21 Merging Bracketed Images 4

211 Loading Bracketed Images 4

212 General Pre-Processing Options 6

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool 7

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files 8

22 Working with Single Image Files 9

221 Options for Single RAW Image Files

9

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion 10

31 Image Adjustment Workow 10

32 Image Adjustment Windows 11

321 Preview Window 11

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel 12

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings 13

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings 15

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

1636 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings 16

4 Automating with Batch Processing 17

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos 17

411 Using Batch Processing 17

412 Batch Processing Settings 18

413 Batch Processing Subfolders 19

414 Advanced Options 19

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files 20

5 Tips and Techniques 21

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix Pro 21

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW Converters 21

53 Dealing with Noise 22

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management 22

Glossary 23

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 429

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 529

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Photomatix Pro works with photographs o the same scene taken under dierent exposure settings oten called

ldquobracketedrdquo images in reerence to the auto-bracketing exposure unctions available on many camera models I

you have not taken bracketed photos you can start using Photomatix Pro with the sample images available rom

the download page o the Photomatix Pro website ndash httpwwwhdrsotcom Use the inormation in Section

1 Taking Photos or HDR to try Photomatix with your own images

1

This manual contains inormation about how to use Photomatix Pro to adjust images using dierent Tone

Mapping or Exposure Fusion methods All o the methods are accessed rom one window within the application

making it easy to try dierent settings to achieve the results you want Reer to Section 2 Loading and Pre-

Processing Images and Section 3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion or detailed

inormation about the dierent settings that are available

Introduction

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

1 Taking Photos or HDR

The shooting phase is essential or getting good results with Photomatix

To photograph a high contrast scene you need to take several exposures in

order to capture inormation in both the highlights and the shadows o the

scene The exposures taken must properly cover the dynamic range o the

scene especially the shadows

The number o photos you need depends on the scene It also depends onthe Exposure Value (EV) spacing separating the photos I you take them

in one-EV steps (eg -1 0 +1 EV) you will need more photos than i you

take them in two-EV steps (eg -2 0 +2 EV) We recommend shooting in

two-EV steps whenever possible

High contrast scenes can be grouped into roughly two types depending on

their dynamic range

bull Medium dynamic range scene Most landscapes and other types o

outdoor scenes all into this category Three exposures taken in two-EV

steps (ie ndash2 0 +2 EV) or ve exposures taken in one-EV steps are usu-

ally sucient or this type o scenebull High dynamic range scene A typical example is the interior o a room

with a view outside the window on a sunny day You need to take at

least ve exposures in two-EV steps (or nine exposures in one-EV steps)

to capture this type o scene but you may need more Taking the expo-

sures manually is recommended in these cases

The source photographs or HDR processing can be taken with digital or

lm-based cameras The only requirement is that the exposure can be ad-

justed when taking pictures I you use a lm-based camera you will need

to scan the photographs into your computer beore processing them (reer

to Section 13)

2

Three exposures o a medium

dynamic range scene taken in two-

EV steps

11 Setting up the Camera

bull Set your camera to Aperture priority (A setting) so only the shutter

speed varies between the exposures

bull Select a low ISO such as ISO 100 or lower

bull Turn o the fash The fash may try to balance the exposure o all the

images when the goal is a range o exposures

bull Mount the camera on a tripod whenever possible Even though

Photomatix Pro oers automatic alignment o hand-held photos using

a tripod is always better

DSLR cameras and some compact digital cameras oer Automatic

Exposure Bracketing (AEB) This enables you to automatically take three

or more exposures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more

underexposed and one or more overexposed Follow these steps i your

camera oers AEB mode

Canon Rebel XTi400D LCD showing AEB with +-2 increments selected

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 3

bull Select the Continuous shooting mode on the camerarsquos drive setting

Consult your camera manual or model-specic instructions or using

this setting

bull Set the camera to Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

bull I possible use the camerarsquos sel-timer setting or a cable release to mini-

mize camera shake

bull Set the exposure increment to +- 2 or optimal exposure range I yourcamera does not oer +- 2 exposure increments select the maximum

possible Consult the camera manual or model-specic instructions or

choosing this setting

AEB settings on a Nikon D80(3 shots with +- 2EV)

12 Selecting the Exposures

To get good results with HDR processing your capture sequence must

include photos that correctly expose highlights and photos that correctly

expose shadows The latter is especially important to prevent noise rom

showing in the processed HDR image

In the lightest photo o the sequence the darkest shadows should be at

least in the mid-tones To check this use your camerarsquos histogram preview

in playback mode In your most overexposed photo the let part o the

histogram should be empty until 13rd o the histogramrsquos width I this is

not the case add one or more photos taken with longer exposure times

Another option is to re-shoot the exposure sequence with the normal

exposure set one or more EVs higher i your most underexposed image in

the exposure sequence was too dark This is the case when the histogram

o your darkest image is completely empty on the right hal

13 Using Film-Based Cameras

bull Follow the camera setup listed at the top o Section 21 and the tips on selecting exposures in Section 22

Keep in mind that you will not have the option o previewing the live histogram to determine your exposurerange

bull Scan lm or slides not prints Photo labs attempt to make the best print rom each o your source images

and you will not achieve good results scanning these or HDR generation

bull Turn o your scannerrsquos auto-exposure options This allows you to manually control the exposure

bull Make sure you select the Align images option in Photomatix Pro when combining your images

The continuous shooting mode maynot always be the best strategy be-

cause camera shake may build upIt is recommended to use a method

that ensures the least possible

shake for each single shot such asmirror lock-up functionality ifavailable

The number o exposures needed depends on the dynamic range o the

scene in addition to the exposure increment For most outdoor scenes

three exposures taken at +- 2 exposure increments is sucient provided

the scene does not include the sun However or the interior o a roomwith a bright view out the window you will need at least ve images taken

with an exposure increment o +- 2 or nine images taken with an expo-

sure increment o +- 1

In scenes with extreme dierences between light and dark details you

should change the exposures manually to ensure you capture a wide

enough range to cover your scene

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 4

2 Loading and Pre-Processing Images

This section describes how to load and merge bracketed image les o a

scene taken under dierent exposure settings as well as how to load single

images into Photomatix Pro

21 Merging Bracketed Images

Photomatix Pro merges bracketed images that are in 8 bit or 16 bitschan-

nel mode as well as Camera RAW les

Supported le types include JPEG TIFF PSD DNG and RAW les rom

many camera models The list o supported camera models or RAW les

changes requently You can check the the Photomatix Pro FAQ page on

the HDRsot website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportrawhtml to

determine whether or not your camera model is supported

211 Loading Bracketed Images

To load bracketed image les do one o the ollowing

bull Drag and drop the les into Photomatix Pro

bull Use the Workfow Shortcuts area or the File menu to load the les

Dragging and Dropping Bracketed Image Files

To drag and drop a group o image les to Photomatix Pro

bull Windows Drag the les rom Windows Explorer and drop them on the

open Photomatix Pro program

bull Macintosh Drag the les rom the Finder and drop them on the Photo-

matix Pro icon on your Dock

The term ldquobracketed imagesrdquo refersto images of the same scene takenunder different exposure settings

This manual uses the termldquobracketed imagesrdquo to simplify how

these images are dened It also

applies to the case when you have

not used the Automatic ExposureBracketing function of the camera totake the exposures

Drag the image les for theexposure sequence at the sametime so the les are properly

processed by the merge

Newer camera models may not besupported by older versions of

Photomatix Pro To ensure your

camera is supported upgrade to thelatest version

If you have Lightroom use the

Lightroom Export Plug-in to loadimages into Photomatix ProRefer

to Section 5 for more information

Note

Note

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 929

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Using the Workfow Area or the File Menu

To load images using the Workfow Shortcuts Area or the File menu

1 Click Load Bracketed Photos in the Workfow Shortcuts area

OR

Select Load Bracketed Photos rom the File menu

The Select bracketed photos dialog displays

5

2 Drag and drop the les into the Selecting bracketed photos dialog

OR

Click Browse A dialog displays prompting or location o the les

3 Select the les to load using one o the ollowing methodsbull Click the rst le hold down control key (Windows) or command

key (Mac) and click the last le

bull Click the rst le hold down shit key and click each le

4 Click Open (Windows) or Select (Mac)

5 Click OK to pre-process the les

Entering Exposure Values

I the exposure inormation cannot be located in the metadata o the

image les Photomatix Pro displays a dialog prompting or input o the

relative Exposure Values or each image Photomatix Pro also displays this

dialog i two or more source images share the same exposure inormation

If you check the Show intermediary

32-bit HDR image box you will be

able to save the pre-processed32-bit image in an HDR image

le format such as Radiance or OpenEXR Saving the 32-bit HDRimage is useful when you want to

be able to process the image withother tone mapping settings later

without having to pre-process andmerge your bracketed photos again

However you will still need to pre-process and merge the photos if

you want to use exposure fusion

You will have to click the Tone

Mapping Fusion button to go to thenext step if you check this box

The order of the les in a bracketing

sequence does not matterPhotomatix Pro systematically

sorts the image les based on the

exposure information retrieved

from the EXIF data If the exposureinformation is not available in EXIFdata Photomatix Pro uses the

relative brightness levels of thephotos

Note

Selecting bracketed photos

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1029

Photomatix Pro User Guide

212 General Pre-Processing Options

Ater the bracketed images are selected the pre-processing settings or the images may be customized beore

the 32-bit HDR image is generated Reer to the ollowing list or a description o the available options or merg-

ing bracketed images

6

Alignment Options

The Align source images option is checked by deault It correctsmisalignment problems when the camera moves slightly between the

bracketed rames Hand-held photographs and even some images shot

with a tripod have camera movement

bull By correcting horizontal and vertical shits Faster method but only

corrects or translation movements

bull By matching eatures Corrects or rotation and translation Recom-

mended or hand-held shots

bull Crop aligned images Checked by deault Removes the unused

borders that appear when the images are shited to correct or mis-

registration Leave this box unchecked i you need the resulting image

to have the same width and height as the source images

Deghosting Options

The Reduce ghosting artiacts option addresses the problem o artiacts

that appear when combining images o a dynamic scene For example i

the moving subjects are people walking the persons show multiple times

in the combined image as i there were ldquoghostsrdquo This is why artiacts arising

rom movements in the scene are commonly reerred to as ldquoghostingrdquo and

the attempt to eliminate them as ldquodeghostingrdquo

Selecting pre-processing options

The deghosting option is effective

for images processed with ToneMapping or with the defaultExposure Fusion method It is not

effective for the other ExposureFusion methods

Note

bull Semi-manual select the ghosted regions and change the image used or deghosting the selected region

Reer to Section 313 or more inormation about the tool

bull Automatic have Photomatix Pro automatically detect ghosted zones in the merged image and select aDetection level Normal or High This sets the criteria or determining i a pixel is or is not ghosted when

using automatic deghosting

Noise Reduction Options

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise and is recommended when processing RAW

les directly in Photomatix

bull Strength Increase or decrease the strength o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined

value based on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

bull On source images Apply noise reduction on the source image les Use the associated drop-down list to

select the image types to apply noise reduction to This option takes more time but yields better results

bull On merged image Apply noise reduction on the merged image once it has been created Note that thenoise reduction algorithm is dierent when applied on the merged image It is recommended to apply the

noise reduction on the source images

bull The Reduce Chromatic Aberrations option automatically corrects color ringing due to chromatic

aberrations o the lens Checking this option is recommended given that chromatic aberrations tend to show

around high contrast edges and are particularly an issue or HDR images

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 7

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool

The Selective Deghosting Tool lets you select the portions of the image that require processing for removing

ghosting due to the movement of the subject Photomatix Pro uses the image that it deems the best exposed for

the selected area as the default image for deghosting You may change the image to one of your choice using the

tool

Select Semi-manual from the Reduce ghosting artifacts preprocessing options to access the Selective deghosting

tool To use the Selective Deghosting tool click and drag the mouse to draw a line around the region that requiresdeghosting Ensure the selection is a fully closed loop with a dashed line

Right-click (Windows) or control-click (Mac) inside the selected region and select Mark selection as ghosted area

from the pop-up menu The line around the selected region changes from dashed to solid to indicate that the area

has been selected for deghosting

Semi-manual deghosting

At any time use the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness of the image Or use the Zoom slider

to zoom in and out

If necessary you can remove a region from the deghosting selection Control click or right click inside an already

marked region and click Remove selection from the pop-up menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 2: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 229

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Contents

Introduction 1

1 Taking Photos for HDR 2

11 Setting up the Camera 2

12 Selecting the Exposures 3

13 Using Film-Based Cameras 3

2 Loading and Pre-Processing Images 4

21 Merging Bracketed Images 4

211 Loading Bracketed Images 4

212 General Pre-Processing Options 6

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool 7

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files 8

22 Working with Single Image Files 9

221 Options for Single RAW Image Files

9

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion 10

31 Image Adjustment Workow 10

32 Image Adjustment Windows 11

321 Preview Window 11

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel 12

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings 13

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings 15

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

1636 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings 16

4 Automating with Batch Processing 17

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos 17

411 Using Batch Processing 17

412 Batch Processing Settings 18

413 Batch Processing Subfolders 19

414 Advanced Options 19

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files 20

5 Tips and Techniques 21

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix Pro 21

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW Converters 21

53 Dealing with Noise 22

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management 22

Glossary 23

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 429

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 529

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Photomatix Pro works with photographs o the same scene taken under dierent exposure settings oten called

ldquobracketedrdquo images in reerence to the auto-bracketing exposure unctions available on many camera models I

you have not taken bracketed photos you can start using Photomatix Pro with the sample images available rom

the download page o the Photomatix Pro website ndash httpwwwhdrsotcom Use the inormation in Section

1 Taking Photos or HDR to try Photomatix with your own images

1

This manual contains inormation about how to use Photomatix Pro to adjust images using dierent Tone

Mapping or Exposure Fusion methods All o the methods are accessed rom one window within the application

making it easy to try dierent settings to achieve the results you want Reer to Section 2 Loading and Pre-

Processing Images and Section 3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion or detailed

inormation about the dierent settings that are available

Introduction

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

1 Taking Photos or HDR

The shooting phase is essential or getting good results with Photomatix

To photograph a high contrast scene you need to take several exposures in

order to capture inormation in both the highlights and the shadows o the

scene The exposures taken must properly cover the dynamic range o the

scene especially the shadows

The number o photos you need depends on the scene It also depends onthe Exposure Value (EV) spacing separating the photos I you take them

in one-EV steps (eg -1 0 +1 EV) you will need more photos than i you

take them in two-EV steps (eg -2 0 +2 EV) We recommend shooting in

two-EV steps whenever possible

High contrast scenes can be grouped into roughly two types depending on

their dynamic range

bull Medium dynamic range scene Most landscapes and other types o

outdoor scenes all into this category Three exposures taken in two-EV

steps (ie ndash2 0 +2 EV) or ve exposures taken in one-EV steps are usu-

ally sucient or this type o scenebull High dynamic range scene A typical example is the interior o a room

with a view outside the window on a sunny day You need to take at

least ve exposures in two-EV steps (or nine exposures in one-EV steps)

to capture this type o scene but you may need more Taking the expo-

sures manually is recommended in these cases

The source photographs or HDR processing can be taken with digital or

lm-based cameras The only requirement is that the exposure can be ad-

justed when taking pictures I you use a lm-based camera you will need

to scan the photographs into your computer beore processing them (reer

to Section 13)

2

Three exposures o a medium

dynamic range scene taken in two-

EV steps

11 Setting up the Camera

bull Set your camera to Aperture priority (A setting) so only the shutter

speed varies between the exposures

bull Select a low ISO such as ISO 100 or lower

bull Turn o the fash The fash may try to balance the exposure o all the

images when the goal is a range o exposures

bull Mount the camera on a tripod whenever possible Even though

Photomatix Pro oers automatic alignment o hand-held photos using

a tripod is always better

DSLR cameras and some compact digital cameras oer Automatic

Exposure Bracketing (AEB) This enables you to automatically take three

or more exposures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more

underexposed and one or more overexposed Follow these steps i your

camera oers AEB mode

Canon Rebel XTi400D LCD showing AEB with +-2 increments selected

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 3

bull Select the Continuous shooting mode on the camerarsquos drive setting

Consult your camera manual or model-specic instructions or using

this setting

bull Set the camera to Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

bull I possible use the camerarsquos sel-timer setting or a cable release to mini-

mize camera shake

bull Set the exposure increment to +- 2 or optimal exposure range I yourcamera does not oer +- 2 exposure increments select the maximum

possible Consult the camera manual or model-specic instructions or

choosing this setting

AEB settings on a Nikon D80(3 shots with +- 2EV)

12 Selecting the Exposures

To get good results with HDR processing your capture sequence must

include photos that correctly expose highlights and photos that correctly

expose shadows The latter is especially important to prevent noise rom

showing in the processed HDR image

In the lightest photo o the sequence the darkest shadows should be at

least in the mid-tones To check this use your camerarsquos histogram preview

in playback mode In your most overexposed photo the let part o the

histogram should be empty until 13rd o the histogramrsquos width I this is

not the case add one or more photos taken with longer exposure times

Another option is to re-shoot the exposure sequence with the normal

exposure set one or more EVs higher i your most underexposed image in

the exposure sequence was too dark This is the case when the histogram

o your darkest image is completely empty on the right hal

13 Using Film-Based Cameras

bull Follow the camera setup listed at the top o Section 21 and the tips on selecting exposures in Section 22

Keep in mind that you will not have the option o previewing the live histogram to determine your exposurerange

bull Scan lm or slides not prints Photo labs attempt to make the best print rom each o your source images

and you will not achieve good results scanning these or HDR generation

bull Turn o your scannerrsquos auto-exposure options This allows you to manually control the exposure

bull Make sure you select the Align images option in Photomatix Pro when combining your images

The continuous shooting mode maynot always be the best strategy be-

cause camera shake may build upIt is recommended to use a method

that ensures the least possible

shake for each single shot such asmirror lock-up functionality ifavailable

The number o exposures needed depends on the dynamic range o the

scene in addition to the exposure increment For most outdoor scenes

three exposures taken at +- 2 exposure increments is sucient provided

the scene does not include the sun However or the interior o a roomwith a bright view out the window you will need at least ve images taken

with an exposure increment o +- 2 or nine images taken with an expo-

sure increment o +- 1

In scenes with extreme dierences between light and dark details you

should change the exposures manually to ensure you capture a wide

enough range to cover your scene

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 4

2 Loading and Pre-Processing Images

This section describes how to load and merge bracketed image les o a

scene taken under dierent exposure settings as well as how to load single

images into Photomatix Pro

21 Merging Bracketed Images

Photomatix Pro merges bracketed images that are in 8 bit or 16 bitschan-

nel mode as well as Camera RAW les

Supported le types include JPEG TIFF PSD DNG and RAW les rom

many camera models The list o supported camera models or RAW les

changes requently You can check the the Photomatix Pro FAQ page on

the HDRsot website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportrawhtml to

determine whether or not your camera model is supported

211 Loading Bracketed Images

To load bracketed image les do one o the ollowing

bull Drag and drop the les into Photomatix Pro

bull Use the Workfow Shortcuts area or the File menu to load the les

Dragging and Dropping Bracketed Image Files

To drag and drop a group o image les to Photomatix Pro

bull Windows Drag the les rom Windows Explorer and drop them on the

open Photomatix Pro program

bull Macintosh Drag the les rom the Finder and drop them on the Photo-

matix Pro icon on your Dock

The term ldquobracketed imagesrdquo refersto images of the same scene takenunder different exposure settings

This manual uses the termldquobracketed imagesrdquo to simplify how

these images are dened It also

applies to the case when you have

not used the Automatic ExposureBracketing function of the camera totake the exposures

Drag the image les for theexposure sequence at the sametime so the les are properly

processed by the merge

Newer camera models may not besupported by older versions of

Photomatix Pro To ensure your

camera is supported upgrade to thelatest version

If you have Lightroom use the

Lightroom Export Plug-in to loadimages into Photomatix ProRefer

to Section 5 for more information

Note

Note

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 929

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Using the Workfow Area or the File Menu

To load images using the Workfow Shortcuts Area or the File menu

1 Click Load Bracketed Photos in the Workfow Shortcuts area

OR

Select Load Bracketed Photos rom the File menu

The Select bracketed photos dialog displays

5

2 Drag and drop the les into the Selecting bracketed photos dialog

OR

Click Browse A dialog displays prompting or location o the les

3 Select the les to load using one o the ollowing methodsbull Click the rst le hold down control key (Windows) or command

key (Mac) and click the last le

bull Click the rst le hold down shit key and click each le

4 Click Open (Windows) or Select (Mac)

5 Click OK to pre-process the les

Entering Exposure Values

I the exposure inormation cannot be located in the metadata o the

image les Photomatix Pro displays a dialog prompting or input o the

relative Exposure Values or each image Photomatix Pro also displays this

dialog i two or more source images share the same exposure inormation

If you check the Show intermediary

32-bit HDR image box you will be

able to save the pre-processed32-bit image in an HDR image

le format such as Radiance or OpenEXR Saving the 32-bit HDRimage is useful when you want to

be able to process the image withother tone mapping settings later

without having to pre-process andmerge your bracketed photos again

However you will still need to pre-process and merge the photos if

you want to use exposure fusion

You will have to click the Tone

Mapping Fusion button to go to thenext step if you check this box

The order of the les in a bracketing

sequence does not matterPhotomatix Pro systematically

sorts the image les based on the

exposure information retrieved

from the EXIF data If the exposureinformation is not available in EXIFdata Photomatix Pro uses the

relative brightness levels of thephotos

Note

Selecting bracketed photos

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1029

Photomatix Pro User Guide

212 General Pre-Processing Options

Ater the bracketed images are selected the pre-processing settings or the images may be customized beore

the 32-bit HDR image is generated Reer to the ollowing list or a description o the available options or merg-

ing bracketed images

6

Alignment Options

The Align source images option is checked by deault It correctsmisalignment problems when the camera moves slightly between the

bracketed rames Hand-held photographs and even some images shot

with a tripod have camera movement

bull By correcting horizontal and vertical shits Faster method but only

corrects or translation movements

bull By matching eatures Corrects or rotation and translation Recom-

mended or hand-held shots

bull Crop aligned images Checked by deault Removes the unused

borders that appear when the images are shited to correct or mis-

registration Leave this box unchecked i you need the resulting image

to have the same width and height as the source images

Deghosting Options

The Reduce ghosting artiacts option addresses the problem o artiacts

that appear when combining images o a dynamic scene For example i

the moving subjects are people walking the persons show multiple times

in the combined image as i there were ldquoghostsrdquo This is why artiacts arising

rom movements in the scene are commonly reerred to as ldquoghostingrdquo and

the attempt to eliminate them as ldquodeghostingrdquo

Selecting pre-processing options

The deghosting option is effective

for images processed with ToneMapping or with the defaultExposure Fusion method It is not

effective for the other ExposureFusion methods

Note

bull Semi-manual select the ghosted regions and change the image used or deghosting the selected region

Reer to Section 313 or more inormation about the tool

bull Automatic have Photomatix Pro automatically detect ghosted zones in the merged image and select aDetection level Normal or High This sets the criteria or determining i a pixel is or is not ghosted when

using automatic deghosting

Noise Reduction Options

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise and is recommended when processing RAW

les directly in Photomatix

bull Strength Increase or decrease the strength o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined

value based on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

bull On source images Apply noise reduction on the source image les Use the associated drop-down list to

select the image types to apply noise reduction to This option takes more time but yields better results

bull On merged image Apply noise reduction on the merged image once it has been created Note that thenoise reduction algorithm is dierent when applied on the merged image It is recommended to apply the

noise reduction on the source images

bull The Reduce Chromatic Aberrations option automatically corrects color ringing due to chromatic

aberrations o the lens Checking this option is recommended given that chromatic aberrations tend to show

around high contrast edges and are particularly an issue or HDR images

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 7

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool

The Selective Deghosting Tool lets you select the portions of the image that require processing for removing

ghosting due to the movement of the subject Photomatix Pro uses the image that it deems the best exposed for

the selected area as the default image for deghosting You may change the image to one of your choice using the

tool

Select Semi-manual from the Reduce ghosting artifacts preprocessing options to access the Selective deghosting

tool To use the Selective Deghosting tool click and drag the mouse to draw a line around the region that requiresdeghosting Ensure the selection is a fully closed loop with a dashed line

Right-click (Windows) or control-click (Mac) inside the selected region and select Mark selection as ghosted area

from the pop-up menu The line around the selected region changes from dashed to solid to indicate that the area

has been selected for deghosting

Semi-manual deghosting

At any time use the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness of the image Or use the Zoom slider

to zoom in and out

If necessary you can remove a region from the deghosting selection Control click or right click inside an already

marked region and click Remove selection from the pop-up menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 3: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Contents

Introduction 1

1 Taking Photos for HDR 2

11 Setting up the Camera 2

12 Selecting the Exposures 3

13 Using Film-Based Cameras 3

2 Loading and Pre-Processing Images 4

21 Merging Bracketed Images 4

211 Loading Bracketed Images 4

212 General Pre-Processing Options 6

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool 7

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files 8

22 Working with Single Image Files 9

221 Options for Single RAW Image Files

9

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion 10

31 Image Adjustment Workow 10

32 Image Adjustment Windows 11

321 Preview Window 11

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel 12

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings 13

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings 15

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

1636 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings 16

4 Automating with Batch Processing 17

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos 17

411 Using Batch Processing 17

412 Batch Processing Settings 18

413 Batch Processing Subfolders 19

414 Advanced Options 19

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files 20

5 Tips and Techniques 21

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix Pro 21

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW Converters 21

53 Dealing with Noise 22

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management 22

Glossary 23

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 429

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 529

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Photomatix Pro works with photographs o the same scene taken under dierent exposure settings oten called

ldquobracketedrdquo images in reerence to the auto-bracketing exposure unctions available on many camera models I

you have not taken bracketed photos you can start using Photomatix Pro with the sample images available rom

the download page o the Photomatix Pro website ndash httpwwwhdrsotcom Use the inormation in Section

1 Taking Photos or HDR to try Photomatix with your own images

1

This manual contains inormation about how to use Photomatix Pro to adjust images using dierent Tone

Mapping or Exposure Fusion methods All o the methods are accessed rom one window within the application

making it easy to try dierent settings to achieve the results you want Reer to Section 2 Loading and Pre-

Processing Images and Section 3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion or detailed

inormation about the dierent settings that are available

Introduction

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

1 Taking Photos or HDR

The shooting phase is essential or getting good results with Photomatix

To photograph a high contrast scene you need to take several exposures in

order to capture inormation in both the highlights and the shadows o the

scene The exposures taken must properly cover the dynamic range o the

scene especially the shadows

The number o photos you need depends on the scene It also depends onthe Exposure Value (EV) spacing separating the photos I you take them

in one-EV steps (eg -1 0 +1 EV) you will need more photos than i you

take them in two-EV steps (eg -2 0 +2 EV) We recommend shooting in

two-EV steps whenever possible

High contrast scenes can be grouped into roughly two types depending on

their dynamic range

bull Medium dynamic range scene Most landscapes and other types o

outdoor scenes all into this category Three exposures taken in two-EV

steps (ie ndash2 0 +2 EV) or ve exposures taken in one-EV steps are usu-

ally sucient or this type o scenebull High dynamic range scene A typical example is the interior o a room

with a view outside the window on a sunny day You need to take at

least ve exposures in two-EV steps (or nine exposures in one-EV steps)

to capture this type o scene but you may need more Taking the expo-

sures manually is recommended in these cases

The source photographs or HDR processing can be taken with digital or

lm-based cameras The only requirement is that the exposure can be ad-

justed when taking pictures I you use a lm-based camera you will need

to scan the photographs into your computer beore processing them (reer

to Section 13)

2

Three exposures o a medium

dynamic range scene taken in two-

EV steps

11 Setting up the Camera

bull Set your camera to Aperture priority (A setting) so only the shutter

speed varies between the exposures

bull Select a low ISO such as ISO 100 or lower

bull Turn o the fash The fash may try to balance the exposure o all the

images when the goal is a range o exposures

bull Mount the camera on a tripod whenever possible Even though

Photomatix Pro oers automatic alignment o hand-held photos using

a tripod is always better

DSLR cameras and some compact digital cameras oer Automatic

Exposure Bracketing (AEB) This enables you to automatically take three

or more exposures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more

underexposed and one or more overexposed Follow these steps i your

camera oers AEB mode

Canon Rebel XTi400D LCD showing AEB with +-2 increments selected

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 3

bull Select the Continuous shooting mode on the camerarsquos drive setting

Consult your camera manual or model-specic instructions or using

this setting

bull Set the camera to Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

bull I possible use the camerarsquos sel-timer setting or a cable release to mini-

mize camera shake

bull Set the exposure increment to +- 2 or optimal exposure range I yourcamera does not oer +- 2 exposure increments select the maximum

possible Consult the camera manual or model-specic instructions or

choosing this setting

AEB settings on a Nikon D80(3 shots with +- 2EV)

12 Selecting the Exposures

To get good results with HDR processing your capture sequence must

include photos that correctly expose highlights and photos that correctly

expose shadows The latter is especially important to prevent noise rom

showing in the processed HDR image

In the lightest photo o the sequence the darkest shadows should be at

least in the mid-tones To check this use your camerarsquos histogram preview

in playback mode In your most overexposed photo the let part o the

histogram should be empty until 13rd o the histogramrsquos width I this is

not the case add one or more photos taken with longer exposure times

Another option is to re-shoot the exposure sequence with the normal

exposure set one or more EVs higher i your most underexposed image in

the exposure sequence was too dark This is the case when the histogram

o your darkest image is completely empty on the right hal

13 Using Film-Based Cameras

bull Follow the camera setup listed at the top o Section 21 and the tips on selecting exposures in Section 22

Keep in mind that you will not have the option o previewing the live histogram to determine your exposurerange

bull Scan lm or slides not prints Photo labs attempt to make the best print rom each o your source images

and you will not achieve good results scanning these or HDR generation

bull Turn o your scannerrsquos auto-exposure options This allows you to manually control the exposure

bull Make sure you select the Align images option in Photomatix Pro when combining your images

The continuous shooting mode maynot always be the best strategy be-

cause camera shake may build upIt is recommended to use a method

that ensures the least possible

shake for each single shot such asmirror lock-up functionality ifavailable

The number o exposures needed depends on the dynamic range o the

scene in addition to the exposure increment For most outdoor scenes

three exposures taken at +- 2 exposure increments is sucient provided

the scene does not include the sun However or the interior o a roomwith a bright view out the window you will need at least ve images taken

with an exposure increment o +- 2 or nine images taken with an expo-

sure increment o +- 1

In scenes with extreme dierences between light and dark details you

should change the exposures manually to ensure you capture a wide

enough range to cover your scene

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 4

2 Loading and Pre-Processing Images

This section describes how to load and merge bracketed image les o a

scene taken under dierent exposure settings as well as how to load single

images into Photomatix Pro

21 Merging Bracketed Images

Photomatix Pro merges bracketed images that are in 8 bit or 16 bitschan-

nel mode as well as Camera RAW les

Supported le types include JPEG TIFF PSD DNG and RAW les rom

many camera models The list o supported camera models or RAW les

changes requently You can check the the Photomatix Pro FAQ page on

the HDRsot website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportrawhtml to

determine whether or not your camera model is supported

211 Loading Bracketed Images

To load bracketed image les do one o the ollowing

bull Drag and drop the les into Photomatix Pro

bull Use the Workfow Shortcuts area or the File menu to load the les

Dragging and Dropping Bracketed Image Files

To drag and drop a group o image les to Photomatix Pro

bull Windows Drag the les rom Windows Explorer and drop them on the

open Photomatix Pro program

bull Macintosh Drag the les rom the Finder and drop them on the Photo-

matix Pro icon on your Dock

The term ldquobracketed imagesrdquo refersto images of the same scene takenunder different exposure settings

This manual uses the termldquobracketed imagesrdquo to simplify how

these images are dened It also

applies to the case when you have

not used the Automatic ExposureBracketing function of the camera totake the exposures

Drag the image les for theexposure sequence at the sametime so the les are properly

processed by the merge

Newer camera models may not besupported by older versions of

Photomatix Pro To ensure your

camera is supported upgrade to thelatest version

If you have Lightroom use the

Lightroom Export Plug-in to loadimages into Photomatix ProRefer

to Section 5 for more information

Note

Note

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 929

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Using the Workfow Area or the File Menu

To load images using the Workfow Shortcuts Area or the File menu

1 Click Load Bracketed Photos in the Workfow Shortcuts area

OR

Select Load Bracketed Photos rom the File menu

The Select bracketed photos dialog displays

5

2 Drag and drop the les into the Selecting bracketed photos dialog

OR

Click Browse A dialog displays prompting or location o the les

3 Select the les to load using one o the ollowing methodsbull Click the rst le hold down control key (Windows) or command

key (Mac) and click the last le

bull Click the rst le hold down shit key and click each le

4 Click Open (Windows) or Select (Mac)

5 Click OK to pre-process the les

Entering Exposure Values

I the exposure inormation cannot be located in the metadata o the

image les Photomatix Pro displays a dialog prompting or input o the

relative Exposure Values or each image Photomatix Pro also displays this

dialog i two or more source images share the same exposure inormation

If you check the Show intermediary

32-bit HDR image box you will be

able to save the pre-processed32-bit image in an HDR image

le format such as Radiance or OpenEXR Saving the 32-bit HDRimage is useful when you want to

be able to process the image withother tone mapping settings later

without having to pre-process andmerge your bracketed photos again

However you will still need to pre-process and merge the photos if

you want to use exposure fusion

You will have to click the Tone

Mapping Fusion button to go to thenext step if you check this box

The order of the les in a bracketing

sequence does not matterPhotomatix Pro systematically

sorts the image les based on the

exposure information retrieved

from the EXIF data If the exposureinformation is not available in EXIFdata Photomatix Pro uses the

relative brightness levels of thephotos

Note

Selecting bracketed photos

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1029

Photomatix Pro User Guide

212 General Pre-Processing Options

Ater the bracketed images are selected the pre-processing settings or the images may be customized beore

the 32-bit HDR image is generated Reer to the ollowing list or a description o the available options or merg-

ing bracketed images

6

Alignment Options

The Align source images option is checked by deault It correctsmisalignment problems when the camera moves slightly between the

bracketed rames Hand-held photographs and even some images shot

with a tripod have camera movement

bull By correcting horizontal and vertical shits Faster method but only

corrects or translation movements

bull By matching eatures Corrects or rotation and translation Recom-

mended or hand-held shots

bull Crop aligned images Checked by deault Removes the unused

borders that appear when the images are shited to correct or mis-

registration Leave this box unchecked i you need the resulting image

to have the same width and height as the source images

Deghosting Options

The Reduce ghosting artiacts option addresses the problem o artiacts

that appear when combining images o a dynamic scene For example i

the moving subjects are people walking the persons show multiple times

in the combined image as i there were ldquoghostsrdquo This is why artiacts arising

rom movements in the scene are commonly reerred to as ldquoghostingrdquo and

the attempt to eliminate them as ldquodeghostingrdquo

Selecting pre-processing options

The deghosting option is effective

for images processed with ToneMapping or with the defaultExposure Fusion method It is not

effective for the other ExposureFusion methods

Note

bull Semi-manual select the ghosted regions and change the image used or deghosting the selected region

Reer to Section 313 or more inormation about the tool

bull Automatic have Photomatix Pro automatically detect ghosted zones in the merged image and select aDetection level Normal or High This sets the criteria or determining i a pixel is or is not ghosted when

using automatic deghosting

Noise Reduction Options

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise and is recommended when processing RAW

les directly in Photomatix

bull Strength Increase or decrease the strength o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined

value based on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

bull On source images Apply noise reduction on the source image les Use the associated drop-down list to

select the image types to apply noise reduction to This option takes more time but yields better results

bull On merged image Apply noise reduction on the merged image once it has been created Note that thenoise reduction algorithm is dierent when applied on the merged image It is recommended to apply the

noise reduction on the source images

bull The Reduce Chromatic Aberrations option automatically corrects color ringing due to chromatic

aberrations o the lens Checking this option is recommended given that chromatic aberrations tend to show

around high contrast edges and are particularly an issue or HDR images

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 7

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool

The Selective Deghosting Tool lets you select the portions of the image that require processing for removing

ghosting due to the movement of the subject Photomatix Pro uses the image that it deems the best exposed for

the selected area as the default image for deghosting You may change the image to one of your choice using the

tool

Select Semi-manual from the Reduce ghosting artifacts preprocessing options to access the Selective deghosting

tool To use the Selective Deghosting tool click and drag the mouse to draw a line around the region that requiresdeghosting Ensure the selection is a fully closed loop with a dashed line

Right-click (Windows) or control-click (Mac) inside the selected region and select Mark selection as ghosted area

from the pop-up menu The line around the selected region changes from dashed to solid to indicate that the area

has been selected for deghosting

Semi-manual deghosting

At any time use the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness of the image Or use the Zoom slider

to zoom in and out

If necessary you can remove a region from the deghosting selection Control click or right click inside an already

marked region and click Remove selection from the pop-up menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 4: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 429

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 529

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Photomatix Pro works with photographs o the same scene taken under dierent exposure settings oten called

ldquobracketedrdquo images in reerence to the auto-bracketing exposure unctions available on many camera models I

you have not taken bracketed photos you can start using Photomatix Pro with the sample images available rom

the download page o the Photomatix Pro website ndash httpwwwhdrsotcom Use the inormation in Section

1 Taking Photos or HDR to try Photomatix with your own images

1

This manual contains inormation about how to use Photomatix Pro to adjust images using dierent Tone

Mapping or Exposure Fusion methods All o the methods are accessed rom one window within the application

making it easy to try dierent settings to achieve the results you want Reer to Section 2 Loading and Pre-

Processing Images and Section 3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion or detailed

inormation about the dierent settings that are available

Introduction

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

1 Taking Photos or HDR

The shooting phase is essential or getting good results with Photomatix

To photograph a high contrast scene you need to take several exposures in

order to capture inormation in both the highlights and the shadows o the

scene The exposures taken must properly cover the dynamic range o the

scene especially the shadows

The number o photos you need depends on the scene It also depends onthe Exposure Value (EV) spacing separating the photos I you take them

in one-EV steps (eg -1 0 +1 EV) you will need more photos than i you

take them in two-EV steps (eg -2 0 +2 EV) We recommend shooting in

two-EV steps whenever possible

High contrast scenes can be grouped into roughly two types depending on

their dynamic range

bull Medium dynamic range scene Most landscapes and other types o

outdoor scenes all into this category Three exposures taken in two-EV

steps (ie ndash2 0 +2 EV) or ve exposures taken in one-EV steps are usu-

ally sucient or this type o scenebull High dynamic range scene A typical example is the interior o a room

with a view outside the window on a sunny day You need to take at

least ve exposures in two-EV steps (or nine exposures in one-EV steps)

to capture this type o scene but you may need more Taking the expo-

sures manually is recommended in these cases

The source photographs or HDR processing can be taken with digital or

lm-based cameras The only requirement is that the exposure can be ad-

justed when taking pictures I you use a lm-based camera you will need

to scan the photographs into your computer beore processing them (reer

to Section 13)

2

Three exposures o a medium

dynamic range scene taken in two-

EV steps

11 Setting up the Camera

bull Set your camera to Aperture priority (A setting) so only the shutter

speed varies between the exposures

bull Select a low ISO such as ISO 100 or lower

bull Turn o the fash The fash may try to balance the exposure o all the

images when the goal is a range o exposures

bull Mount the camera on a tripod whenever possible Even though

Photomatix Pro oers automatic alignment o hand-held photos using

a tripod is always better

DSLR cameras and some compact digital cameras oer Automatic

Exposure Bracketing (AEB) This enables you to automatically take three

or more exposures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more

underexposed and one or more overexposed Follow these steps i your

camera oers AEB mode

Canon Rebel XTi400D LCD showing AEB with +-2 increments selected

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 3

bull Select the Continuous shooting mode on the camerarsquos drive setting

Consult your camera manual or model-specic instructions or using

this setting

bull Set the camera to Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

bull I possible use the camerarsquos sel-timer setting or a cable release to mini-

mize camera shake

bull Set the exposure increment to +- 2 or optimal exposure range I yourcamera does not oer +- 2 exposure increments select the maximum

possible Consult the camera manual or model-specic instructions or

choosing this setting

AEB settings on a Nikon D80(3 shots with +- 2EV)

12 Selecting the Exposures

To get good results with HDR processing your capture sequence must

include photos that correctly expose highlights and photos that correctly

expose shadows The latter is especially important to prevent noise rom

showing in the processed HDR image

In the lightest photo o the sequence the darkest shadows should be at

least in the mid-tones To check this use your camerarsquos histogram preview

in playback mode In your most overexposed photo the let part o the

histogram should be empty until 13rd o the histogramrsquos width I this is

not the case add one or more photos taken with longer exposure times

Another option is to re-shoot the exposure sequence with the normal

exposure set one or more EVs higher i your most underexposed image in

the exposure sequence was too dark This is the case when the histogram

o your darkest image is completely empty on the right hal

13 Using Film-Based Cameras

bull Follow the camera setup listed at the top o Section 21 and the tips on selecting exposures in Section 22

Keep in mind that you will not have the option o previewing the live histogram to determine your exposurerange

bull Scan lm or slides not prints Photo labs attempt to make the best print rom each o your source images

and you will not achieve good results scanning these or HDR generation

bull Turn o your scannerrsquos auto-exposure options This allows you to manually control the exposure

bull Make sure you select the Align images option in Photomatix Pro when combining your images

The continuous shooting mode maynot always be the best strategy be-

cause camera shake may build upIt is recommended to use a method

that ensures the least possible

shake for each single shot such asmirror lock-up functionality ifavailable

The number o exposures needed depends on the dynamic range o the

scene in addition to the exposure increment For most outdoor scenes

three exposures taken at +- 2 exposure increments is sucient provided

the scene does not include the sun However or the interior o a roomwith a bright view out the window you will need at least ve images taken

with an exposure increment o +- 2 or nine images taken with an expo-

sure increment o +- 1

In scenes with extreme dierences between light and dark details you

should change the exposures manually to ensure you capture a wide

enough range to cover your scene

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 4

2 Loading and Pre-Processing Images

This section describes how to load and merge bracketed image les o a

scene taken under dierent exposure settings as well as how to load single

images into Photomatix Pro

21 Merging Bracketed Images

Photomatix Pro merges bracketed images that are in 8 bit or 16 bitschan-

nel mode as well as Camera RAW les

Supported le types include JPEG TIFF PSD DNG and RAW les rom

many camera models The list o supported camera models or RAW les

changes requently You can check the the Photomatix Pro FAQ page on

the HDRsot website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportrawhtml to

determine whether or not your camera model is supported

211 Loading Bracketed Images

To load bracketed image les do one o the ollowing

bull Drag and drop the les into Photomatix Pro

bull Use the Workfow Shortcuts area or the File menu to load the les

Dragging and Dropping Bracketed Image Files

To drag and drop a group o image les to Photomatix Pro

bull Windows Drag the les rom Windows Explorer and drop them on the

open Photomatix Pro program

bull Macintosh Drag the les rom the Finder and drop them on the Photo-

matix Pro icon on your Dock

The term ldquobracketed imagesrdquo refersto images of the same scene takenunder different exposure settings

This manual uses the termldquobracketed imagesrdquo to simplify how

these images are dened It also

applies to the case when you have

not used the Automatic ExposureBracketing function of the camera totake the exposures

Drag the image les for theexposure sequence at the sametime so the les are properly

processed by the merge

Newer camera models may not besupported by older versions of

Photomatix Pro To ensure your

camera is supported upgrade to thelatest version

If you have Lightroom use the

Lightroom Export Plug-in to loadimages into Photomatix ProRefer

to Section 5 for more information

Note

Note

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 929

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Using the Workfow Area or the File Menu

To load images using the Workfow Shortcuts Area or the File menu

1 Click Load Bracketed Photos in the Workfow Shortcuts area

OR

Select Load Bracketed Photos rom the File menu

The Select bracketed photos dialog displays

5

2 Drag and drop the les into the Selecting bracketed photos dialog

OR

Click Browse A dialog displays prompting or location o the les

3 Select the les to load using one o the ollowing methodsbull Click the rst le hold down control key (Windows) or command

key (Mac) and click the last le

bull Click the rst le hold down shit key and click each le

4 Click Open (Windows) or Select (Mac)

5 Click OK to pre-process the les

Entering Exposure Values

I the exposure inormation cannot be located in the metadata o the

image les Photomatix Pro displays a dialog prompting or input o the

relative Exposure Values or each image Photomatix Pro also displays this

dialog i two or more source images share the same exposure inormation

If you check the Show intermediary

32-bit HDR image box you will be

able to save the pre-processed32-bit image in an HDR image

le format such as Radiance or OpenEXR Saving the 32-bit HDRimage is useful when you want to

be able to process the image withother tone mapping settings later

without having to pre-process andmerge your bracketed photos again

However you will still need to pre-process and merge the photos if

you want to use exposure fusion

You will have to click the Tone

Mapping Fusion button to go to thenext step if you check this box

The order of the les in a bracketing

sequence does not matterPhotomatix Pro systematically

sorts the image les based on the

exposure information retrieved

from the EXIF data If the exposureinformation is not available in EXIFdata Photomatix Pro uses the

relative brightness levels of thephotos

Note

Selecting bracketed photos

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1029

Photomatix Pro User Guide

212 General Pre-Processing Options

Ater the bracketed images are selected the pre-processing settings or the images may be customized beore

the 32-bit HDR image is generated Reer to the ollowing list or a description o the available options or merg-

ing bracketed images

6

Alignment Options

The Align source images option is checked by deault It correctsmisalignment problems when the camera moves slightly between the

bracketed rames Hand-held photographs and even some images shot

with a tripod have camera movement

bull By correcting horizontal and vertical shits Faster method but only

corrects or translation movements

bull By matching eatures Corrects or rotation and translation Recom-

mended or hand-held shots

bull Crop aligned images Checked by deault Removes the unused

borders that appear when the images are shited to correct or mis-

registration Leave this box unchecked i you need the resulting image

to have the same width and height as the source images

Deghosting Options

The Reduce ghosting artiacts option addresses the problem o artiacts

that appear when combining images o a dynamic scene For example i

the moving subjects are people walking the persons show multiple times

in the combined image as i there were ldquoghostsrdquo This is why artiacts arising

rom movements in the scene are commonly reerred to as ldquoghostingrdquo and

the attempt to eliminate them as ldquodeghostingrdquo

Selecting pre-processing options

The deghosting option is effective

for images processed with ToneMapping or with the defaultExposure Fusion method It is not

effective for the other ExposureFusion methods

Note

bull Semi-manual select the ghosted regions and change the image used or deghosting the selected region

Reer to Section 313 or more inormation about the tool

bull Automatic have Photomatix Pro automatically detect ghosted zones in the merged image and select aDetection level Normal or High This sets the criteria or determining i a pixel is or is not ghosted when

using automatic deghosting

Noise Reduction Options

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise and is recommended when processing RAW

les directly in Photomatix

bull Strength Increase or decrease the strength o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined

value based on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

bull On source images Apply noise reduction on the source image les Use the associated drop-down list to

select the image types to apply noise reduction to This option takes more time but yields better results

bull On merged image Apply noise reduction on the merged image once it has been created Note that thenoise reduction algorithm is dierent when applied on the merged image It is recommended to apply the

noise reduction on the source images

bull The Reduce Chromatic Aberrations option automatically corrects color ringing due to chromatic

aberrations o the lens Checking this option is recommended given that chromatic aberrations tend to show

around high contrast edges and are particularly an issue or HDR images

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 7

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool

The Selective Deghosting Tool lets you select the portions of the image that require processing for removing

ghosting due to the movement of the subject Photomatix Pro uses the image that it deems the best exposed for

the selected area as the default image for deghosting You may change the image to one of your choice using the

tool

Select Semi-manual from the Reduce ghosting artifacts preprocessing options to access the Selective deghosting

tool To use the Selective Deghosting tool click and drag the mouse to draw a line around the region that requiresdeghosting Ensure the selection is a fully closed loop with a dashed line

Right-click (Windows) or control-click (Mac) inside the selected region and select Mark selection as ghosted area

from the pop-up menu The line around the selected region changes from dashed to solid to indicate that the area

has been selected for deghosting

Semi-manual deghosting

At any time use the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness of the image Or use the Zoom slider

to zoom in and out

If necessary you can remove a region from the deghosting selection Control click or right click inside an already

marked region and click Remove selection from the pop-up menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 5: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 529

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Photomatix Pro works with photographs o the same scene taken under dierent exposure settings oten called

ldquobracketedrdquo images in reerence to the auto-bracketing exposure unctions available on many camera models I

you have not taken bracketed photos you can start using Photomatix Pro with the sample images available rom

the download page o the Photomatix Pro website ndash httpwwwhdrsotcom Use the inormation in Section

1 Taking Photos or HDR to try Photomatix with your own images

1

This manual contains inormation about how to use Photomatix Pro to adjust images using dierent Tone

Mapping or Exposure Fusion methods All o the methods are accessed rom one window within the application

making it easy to try dierent settings to achieve the results you want Reer to Section 2 Loading and Pre-

Processing Images and Section 3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion or detailed

inormation about the dierent settings that are available

Introduction

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

1 Taking Photos or HDR

The shooting phase is essential or getting good results with Photomatix

To photograph a high contrast scene you need to take several exposures in

order to capture inormation in both the highlights and the shadows o the

scene The exposures taken must properly cover the dynamic range o the

scene especially the shadows

The number o photos you need depends on the scene It also depends onthe Exposure Value (EV) spacing separating the photos I you take them

in one-EV steps (eg -1 0 +1 EV) you will need more photos than i you

take them in two-EV steps (eg -2 0 +2 EV) We recommend shooting in

two-EV steps whenever possible

High contrast scenes can be grouped into roughly two types depending on

their dynamic range

bull Medium dynamic range scene Most landscapes and other types o

outdoor scenes all into this category Three exposures taken in two-EV

steps (ie ndash2 0 +2 EV) or ve exposures taken in one-EV steps are usu-

ally sucient or this type o scenebull High dynamic range scene A typical example is the interior o a room

with a view outside the window on a sunny day You need to take at

least ve exposures in two-EV steps (or nine exposures in one-EV steps)

to capture this type o scene but you may need more Taking the expo-

sures manually is recommended in these cases

The source photographs or HDR processing can be taken with digital or

lm-based cameras The only requirement is that the exposure can be ad-

justed when taking pictures I you use a lm-based camera you will need

to scan the photographs into your computer beore processing them (reer

to Section 13)

2

Three exposures o a medium

dynamic range scene taken in two-

EV steps

11 Setting up the Camera

bull Set your camera to Aperture priority (A setting) so only the shutter

speed varies between the exposures

bull Select a low ISO such as ISO 100 or lower

bull Turn o the fash The fash may try to balance the exposure o all the

images when the goal is a range o exposures

bull Mount the camera on a tripod whenever possible Even though

Photomatix Pro oers automatic alignment o hand-held photos using

a tripod is always better

DSLR cameras and some compact digital cameras oer Automatic

Exposure Bracketing (AEB) This enables you to automatically take three

or more exposures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more

underexposed and one or more overexposed Follow these steps i your

camera oers AEB mode

Canon Rebel XTi400D LCD showing AEB with +-2 increments selected

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 3

bull Select the Continuous shooting mode on the camerarsquos drive setting

Consult your camera manual or model-specic instructions or using

this setting

bull Set the camera to Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

bull I possible use the camerarsquos sel-timer setting or a cable release to mini-

mize camera shake

bull Set the exposure increment to +- 2 or optimal exposure range I yourcamera does not oer +- 2 exposure increments select the maximum

possible Consult the camera manual or model-specic instructions or

choosing this setting

AEB settings on a Nikon D80(3 shots with +- 2EV)

12 Selecting the Exposures

To get good results with HDR processing your capture sequence must

include photos that correctly expose highlights and photos that correctly

expose shadows The latter is especially important to prevent noise rom

showing in the processed HDR image

In the lightest photo o the sequence the darkest shadows should be at

least in the mid-tones To check this use your camerarsquos histogram preview

in playback mode In your most overexposed photo the let part o the

histogram should be empty until 13rd o the histogramrsquos width I this is

not the case add one or more photos taken with longer exposure times

Another option is to re-shoot the exposure sequence with the normal

exposure set one or more EVs higher i your most underexposed image in

the exposure sequence was too dark This is the case when the histogram

o your darkest image is completely empty on the right hal

13 Using Film-Based Cameras

bull Follow the camera setup listed at the top o Section 21 and the tips on selecting exposures in Section 22

Keep in mind that you will not have the option o previewing the live histogram to determine your exposurerange

bull Scan lm or slides not prints Photo labs attempt to make the best print rom each o your source images

and you will not achieve good results scanning these or HDR generation

bull Turn o your scannerrsquos auto-exposure options This allows you to manually control the exposure

bull Make sure you select the Align images option in Photomatix Pro when combining your images

The continuous shooting mode maynot always be the best strategy be-

cause camera shake may build upIt is recommended to use a method

that ensures the least possible

shake for each single shot such asmirror lock-up functionality ifavailable

The number o exposures needed depends on the dynamic range o the

scene in addition to the exposure increment For most outdoor scenes

three exposures taken at +- 2 exposure increments is sucient provided

the scene does not include the sun However or the interior o a roomwith a bright view out the window you will need at least ve images taken

with an exposure increment o +- 2 or nine images taken with an expo-

sure increment o +- 1

In scenes with extreme dierences between light and dark details you

should change the exposures manually to ensure you capture a wide

enough range to cover your scene

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 4

2 Loading and Pre-Processing Images

This section describes how to load and merge bracketed image les o a

scene taken under dierent exposure settings as well as how to load single

images into Photomatix Pro

21 Merging Bracketed Images

Photomatix Pro merges bracketed images that are in 8 bit or 16 bitschan-

nel mode as well as Camera RAW les

Supported le types include JPEG TIFF PSD DNG and RAW les rom

many camera models The list o supported camera models or RAW les

changes requently You can check the the Photomatix Pro FAQ page on

the HDRsot website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportrawhtml to

determine whether or not your camera model is supported

211 Loading Bracketed Images

To load bracketed image les do one o the ollowing

bull Drag and drop the les into Photomatix Pro

bull Use the Workfow Shortcuts area or the File menu to load the les

Dragging and Dropping Bracketed Image Files

To drag and drop a group o image les to Photomatix Pro

bull Windows Drag the les rom Windows Explorer and drop them on the

open Photomatix Pro program

bull Macintosh Drag the les rom the Finder and drop them on the Photo-

matix Pro icon on your Dock

The term ldquobracketed imagesrdquo refersto images of the same scene takenunder different exposure settings

This manual uses the termldquobracketed imagesrdquo to simplify how

these images are dened It also

applies to the case when you have

not used the Automatic ExposureBracketing function of the camera totake the exposures

Drag the image les for theexposure sequence at the sametime so the les are properly

processed by the merge

Newer camera models may not besupported by older versions of

Photomatix Pro To ensure your

camera is supported upgrade to thelatest version

If you have Lightroom use the

Lightroom Export Plug-in to loadimages into Photomatix ProRefer

to Section 5 for more information

Note

Note

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 929

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Using the Workfow Area or the File Menu

To load images using the Workfow Shortcuts Area or the File menu

1 Click Load Bracketed Photos in the Workfow Shortcuts area

OR

Select Load Bracketed Photos rom the File menu

The Select bracketed photos dialog displays

5

2 Drag and drop the les into the Selecting bracketed photos dialog

OR

Click Browse A dialog displays prompting or location o the les

3 Select the les to load using one o the ollowing methodsbull Click the rst le hold down control key (Windows) or command

key (Mac) and click the last le

bull Click the rst le hold down shit key and click each le

4 Click Open (Windows) or Select (Mac)

5 Click OK to pre-process the les

Entering Exposure Values

I the exposure inormation cannot be located in the metadata o the

image les Photomatix Pro displays a dialog prompting or input o the

relative Exposure Values or each image Photomatix Pro also displays this

dialog i two or more source images share the same exposure inormation

If you check the Show intermediary

32-bit HDR image box you will be

able to save the pre-processed32-bit image in an HDR image

le format such as Radiance or OpenEXR Saving the 32-bit HDRimage is useful when you want to

be able to process the image withother tone mapping settings later

without having to pre-process andmerge your bracketed photos again

However you will still need to pre-process and merge the photos if

you want to use exposure fusion

You will have to click the Tone

Mapping Fusion button to go to thenext step if you check this box

The order of the les in a bracketing

sequence does not matterPhotomatix Pro systematically

sorts the image les based on the

exposure information retrieved

from the EXIF data If the exposureinformation is not available in EXIFdata Photomatix Pro uses the

relative brightness levels of thephotos

Note

Selecting bracketed photos

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1029

Photomatix Pro User Guide

212 General Pre-Processing Options

Ater the bracketed images are selected the pre-processing settings or the images may be customized beore

the 32-bit HDR image is generated Reer to the ollowing list or a description o the available options or merg-

ing bracketed images

6

Alignment Options

The Align source images option is checked by deault It correctsmisalignment problems when the camera moves slightly between the

bracketed rames Hand-held photographs and even some images shot

with a tripod have camera movement

bull By correcting horizontal and vertical shits Faster method but only

corrects or translation movements

bull By matching eatures Corrects or rotation and translation Recom-

mended or hand-held shots

bull Crop aligned images Checked by deault Removes the unused

borders that appear when the images are shited to correct or mis-

registration Leave this box unchecked i you need the resulting image

to have the same width and height as the source images

Deghosting Options

The Reduce ghosting artiacts option addresses the problem o artiacts

that appear when combining images o a dynamic scene For example i

the moving subjects are people walking the persons show multiple times

in the combined image as i there were ldquoghostsrdquo This is why artiacts arising

rom movements in the scene are commonly reerred to as ldquoghostingrdquo and

the attempt to eliminate them as ldquodeghostingrdquo

Selecting pre-processing options

The deghosting option is effective

for images processed with ToneMapping or with the defaultExposure Fusion method It is not

effective for the other ExposureFusion methods

Note

bull Semi-manual select the ghosted regions and change the image used or deghosting the selected region

Reer to Section 313 or more inormation about the tool

bull Automatic have Photomatix Pro automatically detect ghosted zones in the merged image and select aDetection level Normal or High This sets the criteria or determining i a pixel is or is not ghosted when

using automatic deghosting

Noise Reduction Options

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise and is recommended when processing RAW

les directly in Photomatix

bull Strength Increase or decrease the strength o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined

value based on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

bull On source images Apply noise reduction on the source image les Use the associated drop-down list to

select the image types to apply noise reduction to This option takes more time but yields better results

bull On merged image Apply noise reduction on the merged image once it has been created Note that thenoise reduction algorithm is dierent when applied on the merged image It is recommended to apply the

noise reduction on the source images

bull The Reduce Chromatic Aberrations option automatically corrects color ringing due to chromatic

aberrations o the lens Checking this option is recommended given that chromatic aberrations tend to show

around high contrast edges and are particularly an issue or HDR images

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 7

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool

The Selective Deghosting Tool lets you select the portions of the image that require processing for removing

ghosting due to the movement of the subject Photomatix Pro uses the image that it deems the best exposed for

the selected area as the default image for deghosting You may change the image to one of your choice using the

tool

Select Semi-manual from the Reduce ghosting artifacts preprocessing options to access the Selective deghosting

tool To use the Selective Deghosting tool click and drag the mouse to draw a line around the region that requiresdeghosting Ensure the selection is a fully closed loop with a dashed line

Right-click (Windows) or control-click (Mac) inside the selected region and select Mark selection as ghosted area

from the pop-up menu The line around the selected region changes from dashed to solid to indicate that the area

has been selected for deghosting

Semi-manual deghosting

At any time use the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness of the image Or use the Zoom slider

to zoom in and out

If necessary you can remove a region from the deghosting selection Control click or right click inside an already

marked region and click Remove selection from the pop-up menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 6: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

1 Taking Photos or HDR

The shooting phase is essential or getting good results with Photomatix

To photograph a high contrast scene you need to take several exposures in

order to capture inormation in both the highlights and the shadows o the

scene The exposures taken must properly cover the dynamic range o the

scene especially the shadows

The number o photos you need depends on the scene It also depends onthe Exposure Value (EV) spacing separating the photos I you take them

in one-EV steps (eg -1 0 +1 EV) you will need more photos than i you

take them in two-EV steps (eg -2 0 +2 EV) We recommend shooting in

two-EV steps whenever possible

High contrast scenes can be grouped into roughly two types depending on

their dynamic range

bull Medium dynamic range scene Most landscapes and other types o

outdoor scenes all into this category Three exposures taken in two-EV

steps (ie ndash2 0 +2 EV) or ve exposures taken in one-EV steps are usu-

ally sucient or this type o scenebull High dynamic range scene A typical example is the interior o a room

with a view outside the window on a sunny day You need to take at

least ve exposures in two-EV steps (or nine exposures in one-EV steps)

to capture this type o scene but you may need more Taking the expo-

sures manually is recommended in these cases

The source photographs or HDR processing can be taken with digital or

lm-based cameras The only requirement is that the exposure can be ad-

justed when taking pictures I you use a lm-based camera you will need

to scan the photographs into your computer beore processing them (reer

to Section 13)

2

Three exposures o a medium

dynamic range scene taken in two-

EV steps

11 Setting up the Camera

bull Set your camera to Aperture priority (A setting) so only the shutter

speed varies between the exposures

bull Select a low ISO such as ISO 100 or lower

bull Turn o the fash The fash may try to balance the exposure o all the

images when the goal is a range o exposures

bull Mount the camera on a tripod whenever possible Even though

Photomatix Pro oers automatic alignment o hand-held photos using

a tripod is always better

DSLR cameras and some compact digital cameras oer Automatic

Exposure Bracketing (AEB) This enables you to automatically take three

or more exposures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more

underexposed and one or more overexposed Follow these steps i your

camera oers AEB mode

Canon Rebel XTi400D LCD showing AEB with +-2 increments selected

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 3

bull Select the Continuous shooting mode on the camerarsquos drive setting

Consult your camera manual or model-specic instructions or using

this setting

bull Set the camera to Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

bull I possible use the camerarsquos sel-timer setting or a cable release to mini-

mize camera shake

bull Set the exposure increment to +- 2 or optimal exposure range I yourcamera does not oer +- 2 exposure increments select the maximum

possible Consult the camera manual or model-specic instructions or

choosing this setting

AEB settings on a Nikon D80(3 shots with +- 2EV)

12 Selecting the Exposures

To get good results with HDR processing your capture sequence must

include photos that correctly expose highlights and photos that correctly

expose shadows The latter is especially important to prevent noise rom

showing in the processed HDR image

In the lightest photo o the sequence the darkest shadows should be at

least in the mid-tones To check this use your camerarsquos histogram preview

in playback mode In your most overexposed photo the let part o the

histogram should be empty until 13rd o the histogramrsquos width I this is

not the case add one or more photos taken with longer exposure times

Another option is to re-shoot the exposure sequence with the normal

exposure set one or more EVs higher i your most underexposed image in

the exposure sequence was too dark This is the case when the histogram

o your darkest image is completely empty on the right hal

13 Using Film-Based Cameras

bull Follow the camera setup listed at the top o Section 21 and the tips on selecting exposures in Section 22

Keep in mind that you will not have the option o previewing the live histogram to determine your exposurerange

bull Scan lm or slides not prints Photo labs attempt to make the best print rom each o your source images

and you will not achieve good results scanning these or HDR generation

bull Turn o your scannerrsquos auto-exposure options This allows you to manually control the exposure

bull Make sure you select the Align images option in Photomatix Pro when combining your images

The continuous shooting mode maynot always be the best strategy be-

cause camera shake may build upIt is recommended to use a method

that ensures the least possible

shake for each single shot such asmirror lock-up functionality ifavailable

The number o exposures needed depends on the dynamic range o the

scene in addition to the exposure increment For most outdoor scenes

three exposures taken at +- 2 exposure increments is sucient provided

the scene does not include the sun However or the interior o a roomwith a bright view out the window you will need at least ve images taken

with an exposure increment o +- 2 or nine images taken with an expo-

sure increment o +- 1

In scenes with extreme dierences between light and dark details you

should change the exposures manually to ensure you capture a wide

enough range to cover your scene

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 4

2 Loading and Pre-Processing Images

This section describes how to load and merge bracketed image les o a

scene taken under dierent exposure settings as well as how to load single

images into Photomatix Pro

21 Merging Bracketed Images

Photomatix Pro merges bracketed images that are in 8 bit or 16 bitschan-

nel mode as well as Camera RAW les

Supported le types include JPEG TIFF PSD DNG and RAW les rom

many camera models The list o supported camera models or RAW les

changes requently You can check the the Photomatix Pro FAQ page on

the HDRsot website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportrawhtml to

determine whether or not your camera model is supported

211 Loading Bracketed Images

To load bracketed image les do one o the ollowing

bull Drag and drop the les into Photomatix Pro

bull Use the Workfow Shortcuts area or the File menu to load the les

Dragging and Dropping Bracketed Image Files

To drag and drop a group o image les to Photomatix Pro

bull Windows Drag the les rom Windows Explorer and drop them on the

open Photomatix Pro program

bull Macintosh Drag the les rom the Finder and drop them on the Photo-

matix Pro icon on your Dock

The term ldquobracketed imagesrdquo refersto images of the same scene takenunder different exposure settings

This manual uses the termldquobracketed imagesrdquo to simplify how

these images are dened It also

applies to the case when you have

not used the Automatic ExposureBracketing function of the camera totake the exposures

Drag the image les for theexposure sequence at the sametime so the les are properly

processed by the merge

Newer camera models may not besupported by older versions of

Photomatix Pro To ensure your

camera is supported upgrade to thelatest version

If you have Lightroom use the

Lightroom Export Plug-in to loadimages into Photomatix ProRefer

to Section 5 for more information

Note

Note

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 929

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Using the Workfow Area or the File Menu

To load images using the Workfow Shortcuts Area or the File menu

1 Click Load Bracketed Photos in the Workfow Shortcuts area

OR

Select Load Bracketed Photos rom the File menu

The Select bracketed photos dialog displays

5

2 Drag and drop the les into the Selecting bracketed photos dialog

OR

Click Browse A dialog displays prompting or location o the les

3 Select the les to load using one o the ollowing methodsbull Click the rst le hold down control key (Windows) or command

key (Mac) and click the last le

bull Click the rst le hold down shit key and click each le

4 Click Open (Windows) or Select (Mac)

5 Click OK to pre-process the les

Entering Exposure Values

I the exposure inormation cannot be located in the metadata o the

image les Photomatix Pro displays a dialog prompting or input o the

relative Exposure Values or each image Photomatix Pro also displays this

dialog i two or more source images share the same exposure inormation

If you check the Show intermediary

32-bit HDR image box you will be

able to save the pre-processed32-bit image in an HDR image

le format such as Radiance or OpenEXR Saving the 32-bit HDRimage is useful when you want to

be able to process the image withother tone mapping settings later

without having to pre-process andmerge your bracketed photos again

However you will still need to pre-process and merge the photos if

you want to use exposure fusion

You will have to click the Tone

Mapping Fusion button to go to thenext step if you check this box

The order of the les in a bracketing

sequence does not matterPhotomatix Pro systematically

sorts the image les based on the

exposure information retrieved

from the EXIF data If the exposureinformation is not available in EXIFdata Photomatix Pro uses the

relative brightness levels of thephotos

Note

Selecting bracketed photos

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1029

Photomatix Pro User Guide

212 General Pre-Processing Options

Ater the bracketed images are selected the pre-processing settings or the images may be customized beore

the 32-bit HDR image is generated Reer to the ollowing list or a description o the available options or merg-

ing bracketed images

6

Alignment Options

The Align source images option is checked by deault It correctsmisalignment problems when the camera moves slightly between the

bracketed rames Hand-held photographs and even some images shot

with a tripod have camera movement

bull By correcting horizontal and vertical shits Faster method but only

corrects or translation movements

bull By matching eatures Corrects or rotation and translation Recom-

mended or hand-held shots

bull Crop aligned images Checked by deault Removes the unused

borders that appear when the images are shited to correct or mis-

registration Leave this box unchecked i you need the resulting image

to have the same width and height as the source images

Deghosting Options

The Reduce ghosting artiacts option addresses the problem o artiacts

that appear when combining images o a dynamic scene For example i

the moving subjects are people walking the persons show multiple times

in the combined image as i there were ldquoghostsrdquo This is why artiacts arising

rom movements in the scene are commonly reerred to as ldquoghostingrdquo and

the attempt to eliminate them as ldquodeghostingrdquo

Selecting pre-processing options

The deghosting option is effective

for images processed with ToneMapping or with the defaultExposure Fusion method It is not

effective for the other ExposureFusion methods

Note

bull Semi-manual select the ghosted regions and change the image used or deghosting the selected region

Reer to Section 313 or more inormation about the tool

bull Automatic have Photomatix Pro automatically detect ghosted zones in the merged image and select aDetection level Normal or High This sets the criteria or determining i a pixel is or is not ghosted when

using automatic deghosting

Noise Reduction Options

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise and is recommended when processing RAW

les directly in Photomatix

bull Strength Increase or decrease the strength o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined

value based on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

bull On source images Apply noise reduction on the source image les Use the associated drop-down list to

select the image types to apply noise reduction to This option takes more time but yields better results

bull On merged image Apply noise reduction on the merged image once it has been created Note that thenoise reduction algorithm is dierent when applied on the merged image It is recommended to apply the

noise reduction on the source images

bull The Reduce Chromatic Aberrations option automatically corrects color ringing due to chromatic

aberrations o the lens Checking this option is recommended given that chromatic aberrations tend to show

around high contrast edges and are particularly an issue or HDR images

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 7

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool

The Selective Deghosting Tool lets you select the portions of the image that require processing for removing

ghosting due to the movement of the subject Photomatix Pro uses the image that it deems the best exposed for

the selected area as the default image for deghosting You may change the image to one of your choice using the

tool

Select Semi-manual from the Reduce ghosting artifacts preprocessing options to access the Selective deghosting

tool To use the Selective Deghosting tool click and drag the mouse to draw a line around the region that requiresdeghosting Ensure the selection is a fully closed loop with a dashed line

Right-click (Windows) or control-click (Mac) inside the selected region and select Mark selection as ghosted area

from the pop-up menu The line around the selected region changes from dashed to solid to indicate that the area

has been selected for deghosting

Semi-manual deghosting

At any time use the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness of the image Or use the Zoom slider

to zoom in and out

If necessary you can remove a region from the deghosting selection Control click or right click inside an already

marked region and click Remove selection from the pop-up menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 7: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 3

bull Select the Continuous shooting mode on the camerarsquos drive setting

Consult your camera manual or model-specic instructions or using

this setting

bull Set the camera to Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

bull I possible use the camerarsquos sel-timer setting or a cable release to mini-

mize camera shake

bull Set the exposure increment to +- 2 or optimal exposure range I yourcamera does not oer +- 2 exposure increments select the maximum

possible Consult the camera manual or model-specic instructions or

choosing this setting

AEB settings on a Nikon D80(3 shots with +- 2EV)

12 Selecting the Exposures

To get good results with HDR processing your capture sequence must

include photos that correctly expose highlights and photos that correctly

expose shadows The latter is especially important to prevent noise rom

showing in the processed HDR image

In the lightest photo o the sequence the darkest shadows should be at

least in the mid-tones To check this use your camerarsquos histogram preview

in playback mode In your most overexposed photo the let part o the

histogram should be empty until 13rd o the histogramrsquos width I this is

not the case add one or more photos taken with longer exposure times

Another option is to re-shoot the exposure sequence with the normal

exposure set one or more EVs higher i your most underexposed image in

the exposure sequence was too dark This is the case when the histogram

o your darkest image is completely empty on the right hal

13 Using Film-Based Cameras

bull Follow the camera setup listed at the top o Section 21 and the tips on selecting exposures in Section 22

Keep in mind that you will not have the option o previewing the live histogram to determine your exposurerange

bull Scan lm or slides not prints Photo labs attempt to make the best print rom each o your source images

and you will not achieve good results scanning these or HDR generation

bull Turn o your scannerrsquos auto-exposure options This allows you to manually control the exposure

bull Make sure you select the Align images option in Photomatix Pro when combining your images

The continuous shooting mode maynot always be the best strategy be-

cause camera shake may build upIt is recommended to use a method

that ensures the least possible

shake for each single shot such asmirror lock-up functionality ifavailable

The number o exposures needed depends on the dynamic range o the

scene in addition to the exposure increment For most outdoor scenes

three exposures taken at +- 2 exposure increments is sucient provided

the scene does not include the sun However or the interior o a roomwith a bright view out the window you will need at least ve images taken

with an exposure increment o +- 2 or nine images taken with an expo-

sure increment o +- 1

In scenes with extreme dierences between light and dark details you

should change the exposures manually to ensure you capture a wide

enough range to cover your scene

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 4

2 Loading and Pre-Processing Images

This section describes how to load and merge bracketed image les o a

scene taken under dierent exposure settings as well as how to load single

images into Photomatix Pro

21 Merging Bracketed Images

Photomatix Pro merges bracketed images that are in 8 bit or 16 bitschan-

nel mode as well as Camera RAW les

Supported le types include JPEG TIFF PSD DNG and RAW les rom

many camera models The list o supported camera models or RAW les

changes requently You can check the the Photomatix Pro FAQ page on

the HDRsot website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportrawhtml to

determine whether or not your camera model is supported

211 Loading Bracketed Images

To load bracketed image les do one o the ollowing

bull Drag and drop the les into Photomatix Pro

bull Use the Workfow Shortcuts area or the File menu to load the les

Dragging and Dropping Bracketed Image Files

To drag and drop a group o image les to Photomatix Pro

bull Windows Drag the les rom Windows Explorer and drop them on the

open Photomatix Pro program

bull Macintosh Drag the les rom the Finder and drop them on the Photo-

matix Pro icon on your Dock

The term ldquobracketed imagesrdquo refersto images of the same scene takenunder different exposure settings

This manual uses the termldquobracketed imagesrdquo to simplify how

these images are dened It also

applies to the case when you have

not used the Automatic ExposureBracketing function of the camera totake the exposures

Drag the image les for theexposure sequence at the sametime so the les are properly

processed by the merge

Newer camera models may not besupported by older versions of

Photomatix Pro To ensure your

camera is supported upgrade to thelatest version

If you have Lightroom use the

Lightroom Export Plug-in to loadimages into Photomatix ProRefer

to Section 5 for more information

Note

Note

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 929

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Using the Workfow Area or the File Menu

To load images using the Workfow Shortcuts Area or the File menu

1 Click Load Bracketed Photos in the Workfow Shortcuts area

OR

Select Load Bracketed Photos rom the File menu

The Select bracketed photos dialog displays

5

2 Drag and drop the les into the Selecting bracketed photos dialog

OR

Click Browse A dialog displays prompting or location o the les

3 Select the les to load using one o the ollowing methodsbull Click the rst le hold down control key (Windows) or command

key (Mac) and click the last le

bull Click the rst le hold down shit key and click each le

4 Click Open (Windows) or Select (Mac)

5 Click OK to pre-process the les

Entering Exposure Values

I the exposure inormation cannot be located in the metadata o the

image les Photomatix Pro displays a dialog prompting or input o the

relative Exposure Values or each image Photomatix Pro also displays this

dialog i two or more source images share the same exposure inormation

If you check the Show intermediary

32-bit HDR image box you will be

able to save the pre-processed32-bit image in an HDR image

le format such as Radiance or OpenEXR Saving the 32-bit HDRimage is useful when you want to

be able to process the image withother tone mapping settings later

without having to pre-process andmerge your bracketed photos again

However you will still need to pre-process and merge the photos if

you want to use exposure fusion

You will have to click the Tone

Mapping Fusion button to go to thenext step if you check this box

The order of the les in a bracketing

sequence does not matterPhotomatix Pro systematically

sorts the image les based on the

exposure information retrieved

from the EXIF data If the exposureinformation is not available in EXIFdata Photomatix Pro uses the

relative brightness levels of thephotos

Note

Selecting bracketed photos

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1029

Photomatix Pro User Guide

212 General Pre-Processing Options

Ater the bracketed images are selected the pre-processing settings or the images may be customized beore

the 32-bit HDR image is generated Reer to the ollowing list or a description o the available options or merg-

ing bracketed images

6

Alignment Options

The Align source images option is checked by deault It correctsmisalignment problems when the camera moves slightly between the

bracketed rames Hand-held photographs and even some images shot

with a tripod have camera movement

bull By correcting horizontal and vertical shits Faster method but only

corrects or translation movements

bull By matching eatures Corrects or rotation and translation Recom-

mended or hand-held shots

bull Crop aligned images Checked by deault Removes the unused

borders that appear when the images are shited to correct or mis-

registration Leave this box unchecked i you need the resulting image

to have the same width and height as the source images

Deghosting Options

The Reduce ghosting artiacts option addresses the problem o artiacts

that appear when combining images o a dynamic scene For example i

the moving subjects are people walking the persons show multiple times

in the combined image as i there were ldquoghostsrdquo This is why artiacts arising

rom movements in the scene are commonly reerred to as ldquoghostingrdquo and

the attempt to eliminate them as ldquodeghostingrdquo

Selecting pre-processing options

The deghosting option is effective

for images processed with ToneMapping or with the defaultExposure Fusion method It is not

effective for the other ExposureFusion methods

Note

bull Semi-manual select the ghosted regions and change the image used or deghosting the selected region

Reer to Section 313 or more inormation about the tool

bull Automatic have Photomatix Pro automatically detect ghosted zones in the merged image and select aDetection level Normal or High This sets the criteria or determining i a pixel is or is not ghosted when

using automatic deghosting

Noise Reduction Options

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise and is recommended when processing RAW

les directly in Photomatix

bull Strength Increase or decrease the strength o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined

value based on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

bull On source images Apply noise reduction on the source image les Use the associated drop-down list to

select the image types to apply noise reduction to This option takes more time but yields better results

bull On merged image Apply noise reduction on the merged image once it has been created Note that thenoise reduction algorithm is dierent when applied on the merged image It is recommended to apply the

noise reduction on the source images

bull The Reduce Chromatic Aberrations option automatically corrects color ringing due to chromatic

aberrations o the lens Checking this option is recommended given that chromatic aberrations tend to show

around high contrast edges and are particularly an issue or HDR images

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 7

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool

The Selective Deghosting Tool lets you select the portions of the image that require processing for removing

ghosting due to the movement of the subject Photomatix Pro uses the image that it deems the best exposed for

the selected area as the default image for deghosting You may change the image to one of your choice using the

tool

Select Semi-manual from the Reduce ghosting artifacts preprocessing options to access the Selective deghosting

tool To use the Selective Deghosting tool click and drag the mouse to draw a line around the region that requiresdeghosting Ensure the selection is a fully closed loop with a dashed line

Right-click (Windows) or control-click (Mac) inside the selected region and select Mark selection as ghosted area

from the pop-up menu The line around the selected region changes from dashed to solid to indicate that the area

has been selected for deghosting

Semi-manual deghosting

At any time use the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness of the image Or use the Zoom slider

to zoom in and out

If necessary you can remove a region from the deghosting selection Control click or right click inside an already

marked region and click Remove selection from the pop-up menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 8: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 4

2 Loading and Pre-Processing Images

This section describes how to load and merge bracketed image les o a

scene taken under dierent exposure settings as well as how to load single

images into Photomatix Pro

21 Merging Bracketed Images

Photomatix Pro merges bracketed images that are in 8 bit or 16 bitschan-

nel mode as well as Camera RAW les

Supported le types include JPEG TIFF PSD DNG and RAW les rom

many camera models The list o supported camera models or RAW les

changes requently You can check the the Photomatix Pro FAQ page on

the HDRsot website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportrawhtml to

determine whether or not your camera model is supported

211 Loading Bracketed Images

To load bracketed image les do one o the ollowing

bull Drag and drop the les into Photomatix Pro

bull Use the Workfow Shortcuts area or the File menu to load the les

Dragging and Dropping Bracketed Image Files

To drag and drop a group o image les to Photomatix Pro

bull Windows Drag the les rom Windows Explorer and drop them on the

open Photomatix Pro program

bull Macintosh Drag the les rom the Finder and drop them on the Photo-

matix Pro icon on your Dock

The term ldquobracketed imagesrdquo refersto images of the same scene takenunder different exposure settings

This manual uses the termldquobracketed imagesrdquo to simplify how

these images are dened It also

applies to the case when you have

not used the Automatic ExposureBracketing function of the camera totake the exposures

Drag the image les for theexposure sequence at the sametime so the les are properly

processed by the merge

Newer camera models may not besupported by older versions of

Photomatix Pro To ensure your

camera is supported upgrade to thelatest version

If you have Lightroom use the

Lightroom Export Plug-in to loadimages into Photomatix ProRefer

to Section 5 for more information

Note

Note

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 929

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Using the Workfow Area or the File Menu

To load images using the Workfow Shortcuts Area or the File menu

1 Click Load Bracketed Photos in the Workfow Shortcuts area

OR

Select Load Bracketed Photos rom the File menu

The Select bracketed photos dialog displays

5

2 Drag and drop the les into the Selecting bracketed photos dialog

OR

Click Browse A dialog displays prompting or location o the les

3 Select the les to load using one o the ollowing methodsbull Click the rst le hold down control key (Windows) or command

key (Mac) and click the last le

bull Click the rst le hold down shit key and click each le

4 Click Open (Windows) or Select (Mac)

5 Click OK to pre-process the les

Entering Exposure Values

I the exposure inormation cannot be located in the metadata o the

image les Photomatix Pro displays a dialog prompting or input o the

relative Exposure Values or each image Photomatix Pro also displays this

dialog i two or more source images share the same exposure inormation

If you check the Show intermediary

32-bit HDR image box you will be

able to save the pre-processed32-bit image in an HDR image

le format such as Radiance or OpenEXR Saving the 32-bit HDRimage is useful when you want to

be able to process the image withother tone mapping settings later

without having to pre-process andmerge your bracketed photos again

However you will still need to pre-process and merge the photos if

you want to use exposure fusion

You will have to click the Tone

Mapping Fusion button to go to thenext step if you check this box

The order of the les in a bracketing

sequence does not matterPhotomatix Pro systematically

sorts the image les based on the

exposure information retrieved

from the EXIF data If the exposureinformation is not available in EXIFdata Photomatix Pro uses the

relative brightness levels of thephotos

Note

Selecting bracketed photos

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1029

Photomatix Pro User Guide

212 General Pre-Processing Options

Ater the bracketed images are selected the pre-processing settings or the images may be customized beore

the 32-bit HDR image is generated Reer to the ollowing list or a description o the available options or merg-

ing bracketed images

6

Alignment Options

The Align source images option is checked by deault It correctsmisalignment problems when the camera moves slightly between the

bracketed rames Hand-held photographs and even some images shot

with a tripod have camera movement

bull By correcting horizontal and vertical shits Faster method but only

corrects or translation movements

bull By matching eatures Corrects or rotation and translation Recom-

mended or hand-held shots

bull Crop aligned images Checked by deault Removes the unused

borders that appear when the images are shited to correct or mis-

registration Leave this box unchecked i you need the resulting image

to have the same width and height as the source images

Deghosting Options

The Reduce ghosting artiacts option addresses the problem o artiacts

that appear when combining images o a dynamic scene For example i

the moving subjects are people walking the persons show multiple times

in the combined image as i there were ldquoghostsrdquo This is why artiacts arising

rom movements in the scene are commonly reerred to as ldquoghostingrdquo and

the attempt to eliminate them as ldquodeghostingrdquo

Selecting pre-processing options

The deghosting option is effective

for images processed with ToneMapping or with the defaultExposure Fusion method It is not

effective for the other ExposureFusion methods

Note

bull Semi-manual select the ghosted regions and change the image used or deghosting the selected region

Reer to Section 313 or more inormation about the tool

bull Automatic have Photomatix Pro automatically detect ghosted zones in the merged image and select aDetection level Normal or High This sets the criteria or determining i a pixel is or is not ghosted when

using automatic deghosting

Noise Reduction Options

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise and is recommended when processing RAW

les directly in Photomatix

bull Strength Increase or decrease the strength o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined

value based on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

bull On source images Apply noise reduction on the source image les Use the associated drop-down list to

select the image types to apply noise reduction to This option takes more time but yields better results

bull On merged image Apply noise reduction on the merged image once it has been created Note that thenoise reduction algorithm is dierent when applied on the merged image It is recommended to apply the

noise reduction on the source images

bull The Reduce Chromatic Aberrations option automatically corrects color ringing due to chromatic

aberrations o the lens Checking this option is recommended given that chromatic aberrations tend to show

around high contrast edges and are particularly an issue or HDR images

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 7

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool

The Selective Deghosting Tool lets you select the portions of the image that require processing for removing

ghosting due to the movement of the subject Photomatix Pro uses the image that it deems the best exposed for

the selected area as the default image for deghosting You may change the image to one of your choice using the

tool

Select Semi-manual from the Reduce ghosting artifacts preprocessing options to access the Selective deghosting

tool To use the Selective Deghosting tool click and drag the mouse to draw a line around the region that requiresdeghosting Ensure the selection is a fully closed loop with a dashed line

Right-click (Windows) or control-click (Mac) inside the selected region and select Mark selection as ghosted area

from the pop-up menu The line around the selected region changes from dashed to solid to indicate that the area

has been selected for deghosting

Semi-manual deghosting

At any time use the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness of the image Or use the Zoom slider

to zoom in and out

If necessary you can remove a region from the deghosting selection Control click or right click inside an already

marked region and click Remove selection from the pop-up menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 9: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 929

Photomatix Pro User Guide

Using the Workfow Area or the File Menu

To load images using the Workfow Shortcuts Area or the File menu

1 Click Load Bracketed Photos in the Workfow Shortcuts area

OR

Select Load Bracketed Photos rom the File menu

The Select bracketed photos dialog displays

5

2 Drag and drop the les into the Selecting bracketed photos dialog

OR

Click Browse A dialog displays prompting or location o the les

3 Select the les to load using one o the ollowing methodsbull Click the rst le hold down control key (Windows) or command

key (Mac) and click the last le

bull Click the rst le hold down shit key and click each le

4 Click Open (Windows) or Select (Mac)

5 Click OK to pre-process the les

Entering Exposure Values

I the exposure inormation cannot be located in the metadata o the

image les Photomatix Pro displays a dialog prompting or input o the

relative Exposure Values or each image Photomatix Pro also displays this

dialog i two or more source images share the same exposure inormation

If you check the Show intermediary

32-bit HDR image box you will be

able to save the pre-processed32-bit image in an HDR image

le format such as Radiance or OpenEXR Saving the 32-bit HDRimage is useful when you want to

be able to process the image withother tone mapping settings later

without having to pre-process andmerge your bracketed photos again

However you will still need to pre-process and merge the photos if

you want to use exposure fusion

You will have to click the Tone

Mapping Fusion button to go to thenext step if you check this box

The order of the les in a bracketing

sequence does not matterPhotomatix Pro systematically

sorts the image les based on the

exposure information retrieved

from the EXIF data If the exposureinformation is not available in EXIFdata Photomatix Pro uses the

relative brightness levels of thephotos

Note

Selecting bracketed photos

Note

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1029

Photomatix Pro User Guide

212 General Pre-Processing Options

Ater the bracketed images are selected the pre-processing settings or the images may be customized beore

the 32-bit HDR image is generated Reer to the ollowing list or a description o the available options or merg-

ing bracketed images

6

Alignment Options

The Align source images option is checked by deault It correctsmisalignment problems when the camera moves slightly between the

bracketed rames Hand-held photographs and even some images shot

with a tripod have camera movement

bull By correcting horizontal and vertical shits Faster method but only

corrects or translation movements

bull By matching eatures Corrects or rotation and translation Recom-

mended or hand-held shots

bull Crop aligned images Checked by deault Removes the unused

borders that appear when the images are shited to correct or mis-

registration Leave this box unchecked i you need the resulting image

to have the same width and height as the source images

Deghosting Options

The Reduce ghosting artiacts option addresses the problem o artiacts

that appear when combining images o a dynamic scene For example i

the moving subjects are people walking the persons show multiple times

in the combined image as i there were ldquoghostsrdquo This is why artiacts arising

rom movements in the scene are commonly reerred to as ldquoghostingrdquo and

the attempt to eliminate them as ldquodeghostingrdquo

Selecting pre-processing options

The deghosting option is effective

for images processed with ToneMapping or with the defaultExposure Fusion method It is not

effective for the other ExposureFusion methods

Note

bull Semi-manual select the ghosted regions and change the image used or deghosting the selected region

Reer to Section 313 or more inormation about the tool

bull Automatic have Photomatix Pro automatically detect ghosted zones in the merged image and select aDetection level Normal or High This sets the criteria or determining i a pixel is or is not ghosted when

using automatic deghosting

Noise Reduction Options

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise and is recommended when processing RAW

les directly in Photomatix

bull Strength Increase or decrease the strength o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined

value based on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

bull On source images Apply noise reduction on the source image les Use the associated drop-down list to

select the image types to apply noise reduction to This option takes more time but yields better results

bull On merged image Apply noise reduction on the merged image once it has been created Note that thenoise reduction algorithm is dierent when applied on the merged image It is recommended to apply the

noise reduction on the source images

bull The Reduce Chromatic Aberrations option automatically corrects color ringing due to chromatic

aberrations o the lens Checking this option is recommended given that chromatic aberrations tend to show

around high contrast edges and are particularly an issue or HDR images

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 7

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool

The Selective Deghosting Tool lets you select the portions of the image that require processing for removing

ghosting due to the movement of the subject Photomatix Pro uses the image that it deems the best exposed for

the selected area as the default image for deghosting You may change the image to one of your choice using the

tool

Select Semi-manual from the Reduce ghosting artifacts preprocessing options to access the Selective deghosting

tool To use the Selective Deghosting tool click and drag the mouse to draw a line around the region that requiresdeghosting Ensure the selection is a fully closed loop with a dashed line

Right-click (Windows) or control-click (Mac) inside the selected region and select Mark selection as ghosted area

from the pop-up menu The line around the selected region changes from dashed to solid to indicate that the area

has been selected for deghosting

Semi-manual deghosting

At any time use the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness of the image Or use the Zoom slider

to zoom in and out

If necessary you can remove a region from the deghosting selection Control click or right click inside an already

marked region and click Remove selection from the pop-up menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 10: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1029

Photomatix Pro User Guide

212 General Pre-Processing Options

Ater the bracketed images are selected the pre-processing settings or the images may be customized beore

the 32-bit HDR image is generated Reer to the ollowing list or a description o the available options or merg-

ing bracketed images

6

Alignment Options

The Align source images option is checked by deault It correctsmisalignment problems when the camera moves slightly between the

bracketed rames Hand-held photographs and even some images shot

with a tripod have camera movement

bull By correcting horizontal and vertical shits Faster method but only

corrects or translation movements

bull By matching eatures Corrects or rotation and translation Recom-

mended or hand-held shots

bull Crop aligned images Checked by deault Removes the unused

borders that appear when the images are shited to correct or mis-

registration Leave this box unchecked i you need the resulting image

to have the same width and height as the source images

Deghosting Options

The Reduce ghosting artiacts option addresses the problem o artiacts

that appear when combining images o a dynamic scene For example i

the moving subjects are people walking the persons show multiple times

in the combined image as i there were ldquoghostsrdquo This is why artiacts arising

rom movements in the scene are commonly reerred to as ldquoghostingrdquo and

the attempt to eliminate them as ldquodeghostingrdquo

Selecting pre-processing options

The deghosting option is effective

for images processed with ToneMapping or with the defaultExposure Fusion method It is not

effective for the other ExposureFusion methods

Note

bull Semi-manual select the ghosted regions and change the image used or deghosting the selected region

Reer to Section 313 or more inormation about the tool

bull Automatic have Photomatix Pro automatically detect ghosted zones in the merged image and select aDetection level Normal or High This sets the criteria or determining i a pixel is or is not ghosted when

using automatic deghosting

Noise Reduction Options

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise and is recommended when processing RAW

les directly in Photomatix

bull Strength Increase or decrease the strength o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined

value based on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

bull On source images Apply noise reduction on the source image les Use the associated drop-down list to

select the image types to apply noise reduction to This option takes more time but yields better results

bull On merged image Apply noise reduction on the merged image once it has been created Note that thenoise reduction algorithm is dierent when applied on the merged image It is recommended to apply the

noise reduction on the source images

bull The Reduce Chromatic Aberrations option automatically corrects color ringing due to chromatic

aberrations o the lens Checking this option is recommended given that chromatic aberrations tend to show

around high contrast edges and are particularly an issue or HDR images

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 7

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool

The Selective Deghosting Tool lets you select the portions of the image that require processing for removing

ghosting due to the movement of the subject Photomatix Pro uses the image that it deems the best exposed for

the selected area as the default image for deghosting You may change the image to one of your choice using the

tool

Select Semi-manual from the Reduce ghosting artifacts preprocessing options to access the Selective deghosting

tool To use the Selective Deghosting tool click and drag the mouse to draw a line around the region that requiresdeghosting Ensure the selection is a fully closed loop with a dashed line

Right-click (Windows) or control-click (Mac) inside the selected region and select Mark selection as ghosted area

from the pop-up menu The line around the selected region changes from dashed to solid to indicate that the area

has been selected for deghosting

Semi-manual deghosting

At any time use the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness of the image Or use the Zoom slider

to zoom in and out

If necessary you can remove a region from the deghosting selection Control click or right click inside an already

marked region and click Remove selection from the pop-up menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 11: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 7

213 Using the Selective Deghosting Tool

The Selective Deghosting Tool lets you select the portions of the image that require processing for removing

ghosting due to the movement of the subject Photomatix Pro uses the image that it deems the best exposed for

the selected area as the default image for deghosting You may change the image to one of your choice using the

tool

Select Semi-manual from the Reduce ghosting artifacts preprocessing options to access the Selective deghosting

tool To use the Selective Deghosting tool click and drag the mouse to draw a line around the region that requiresdeghosting Ensure the selection is a fully closed loop with a dashed line

Right-click (Windows) or control-click (Mac) inside the selected region and select Mark selection as ghosted area

from the pop-up menu The line around the selected region changes from dashed to solid to indicate that the area

has been selected for deghosting

Semi-manual deghosting

At any time use the Brightness slider to increase or decrease the brightness of the image Or use the Zoom slider

to zoom in and out

If necessary you can remove a region from the deghosting selection Control click or right click inside an already

marked region and click Remove selection from the pop-up menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 12: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 8

You may also change the image used as the deault image or deghosting

Control-click or right-click inside an already marked region and click Set an-

other photo for selection rom the pop-up menu The tool displays a pop-

up menu with a list o the available exposures Select an exposure value

rom the list

Preprocessing Options

The photo that the tool automatically

sets or the selection is not always the

most appropriate exposure choice It

is thus a good idea to check whether

changing to another photo produces

a better deghosting result

Note

To view a preview o the deghosted image click Preview deghosting

To make more selections or modiy existing regions selected or deghost-

ing click Return to selection mode You may continue selecting regions o

the image and previewing the results until you are satised with the results

Click OK to apply the deghosting to the image or click Cancel to stop merg-

ing the images

214 Pre-Processing Options for RAW Files

Photomatix Pro ofers additional pre-processing options or RAW les The

White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the efect o the white balance change on

the source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or con-verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriate

when you want to print the resulting image I you would like to display the

resulting image only on the web and do not intend to print it then select

sRGB to avoid having to convert the image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 13: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1329

Photomatix Pro User Guide

22 Working with Single Image FilesPhotomatix Pro supports Tone Mapping o single image les To load a single

image le

1 Drag the image le to the Photomatix Pro application (Windows) or icon

on your Dock (Mac)

OR

Select Open rom the File menu A le browser window displaysNavigate to the le and open it

2 To process the image using Tone Mapping click Tone Mapping rom the

Workfow Shortcut bar

I the le is a JPG a dialog will show to let you decide whether to

reduce the noise on your image beore tone mapping I desired

check Do not ask me again to skip this dialog and use your Yes

or No selection or all single JPGs that you process with Tone

Mapping I you need to re-enable the dialog later access the

Photomatix preerences on the View menu to change the setting

221 Options or Single RAW Image FilesWhen your single image is a RAW le Photomatix must rst convert the RAW

data The ollowing options are available or pre-processing the RAW data

The Reduce noise option reduces chromatic and luminance noise It is

checked by deault as reducing noise is always recommended when process-

ing RAW les The Strength slider lets you increase or decrease the strength

o the noise reduction relative to the automatically determined value based

on the noise level in the image Values range rom 50 to 150

The Reduce chromatic aberrations option automatically corrects color

ringing due to chromatic aberrations o the lens

The White Balance drop-down list includes the ollowing selections

bull As Shot ndash deault value Reads the white balance rom the EXIF meta-

data

bull To adjust the white balance select a pre-dened value rom the White

Balance drop-down list or speciy the color temperature in Kelvin

Click Preview sample to view the eect o the white balance change on the

source image

The Color primaries HDR image drop-down list provides options or to con-

verting the RAW data rom the camera native color space to the display pro-

le o the selected value AdobeRGB is the deault value and is appropriatewhen you want to print the resulting image I you do not intend to print

the image select sRGB or web-only images to avoid having to convert the

image rom AdobeRGB to sRGB

9

Reducing noise on a single image

JPEG fle

RAW Processing Options dialog box

Tone mapping with the DetailsEnhancer method makes anynoise present in the image much

more visible so it is a good idea topre-process your image with noise

reduction before tone mapping

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 14: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1429

Photomatix Pro User Guide

3 Adjusting Images Using Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion

10

Exposure Fusion is only available

when bracketed photos were

loaded When a single image

is loaded only tone mapping is

available

Photomatix Pro provides access to HDR Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion

methods in one window The window includes a preview so you can see

how adjustments to settings or changing the adjustment method aect

the result This section describes the workow or adjusting and processing

images and details the Tone Mapping and Exposure Fusion settings

31 Image Adjustment Workfow

Ater you have preprocessed and merged your source images (or opened a

single image fle) the next steps are

1 Adjust the image to your liking Photomatix Pro oers dierent Tone

Mapping and Exposure Fusion methods Most methods oer dierent

adjustment settings Reer to Sections 33 through 36 or detailed

descriptions o the settings

You can use presets or easier image adjustment Reer to Section 322

or more inormation about using presets

2 Process the image When you are satisfed with the adjustments click on the Process button located at bottom o the Adjustment window to

process the image at original resolution with the selected settings

3 Save the image When you have processed the image you can save it

Select File - gt Save As Navigate to the older where the fle should be

stored Use the deault fle name or enter a name in the File name feld

Select a fle type

bull TIFF ndash 16bit best choice or urther processing

bull TIFF ndash 8bit or use in applications that cannot work with 16 bit or

or avoiding too large a fle size on disk

bull JPEG or use on the web without urther editingI you would like to view the fle with a photo viewing application you can

click Open Saved Images with Accept the deault program or select the

program rom the drop-down list I the program is not on the list click Add application navigate to the older containing the program select the

program and click Open

Note

To undo changes made during

the adjustment process clickthe undo arrow at the bottom of the

adjustments panelTo redo adjustments click the

redo arrow to reapply changes

Note

The settings are automatically embed-ded in the saved processed image To

view the settings click View Settingsfrom the Workflow Shortcuts bar

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 15: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 11

Undoing Adjustments and Reprocessing an Image

Ater processing an image you can return to Tone Mapping or Exposure Fusion to make urther changes i you

are not satised with the results

You may undo processing using one o the ollowing methods

bull Select Undo Tone Mapping or Undo Exposure Fusion rom the Process menu Photomatix Pro returns the

image to its original state

bull Click Tone MappingFusion rom the Workfow Shortcut bar or select Tone MappingFusion to return to the

image adjustment window

bull Size Ratio The radio buttons at top o the Preview dialog may be used to select the preview size related to

the size o the original For instance 14 displays the preview one quarter the size o the original image

bull Zoom The Zoom slider scales the selected size by a percentage

bull Preview The Preview checkbox quickly toggles between a preview o the tone mapped image (the deault)

and the original image Use this to compare the eects o the changes with the original

bull Floating Histogram The tone mapping Histogram is a foating window that contains our selectable tabs to

improve analysis o the image Luminance Red Green and Blue In addition move the mouse back and orth

across the histogram to display Level Count and Percentile inormation I the histogram is turned o enable

it by selecting 8-bit Histograms rom the View menu

32 Image Adjustment Windows

321 Preview Window

The Preview Window provides a preview o the tone mapped or used

image as you adjust the settings as well as the ollowing controls

Previewing image adjustments

For the Details Enhancer method o

Tone Mapping and the Adjust method

o Exposure Fusion the preview is not

always an accurate representation o

the nal tone mapped image

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 16: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1629

Photomatix Pro User Guide

The ollowing built-in presets are available

bull Enhancer - Default Deault settings or De-

tails Enhancerbull Compression - Default Deault Tone Com-

pressor settings

bull Fusion - Default Deault settings or Fusion

Adjust

bull Enhancer - Smooth Efect that produces a

smooth image by avoiding too much contrast

enhancement in the highlights which is use-

ul or instance to prevent a blue sky rom

turning dark grey-blue

bull Compression - Deep darker more com-

pressed Tone Compressor settings that result

in an image with more pronounced colors

bull Enhancer - Painterly See second image on

the right

bull Enhancer - Grunge See third image on the

right

bull Enhancer - BampW Monochrome image which

is achieved by setting the Color Saturation to

zero

bull Fusion - Adjusted Deault Exposure Fusion

method with adjusted settings

bull Fusion - Auto Quick access to Fusion Auto

as opposed to selecting Exposure Fusion and

Auto

bull Fusion - 2 Images Deault Fusion 2 Images

options

bull Fusion - Intensive Deault Fusion Intensive

settings

12

322 Preset Thumbnails Panel

The Preset Thumbnails area provides access to built-in settings each with its own corresponding thumbnail im-

age The built-in presets are ldquoactoryrdquo settings showing various efects The thumbnails provide a way to quickly

view the efect o the settings on the image

Using the Preset Thumbnails Panel to

Adjust an Image(shown in vertical

mode)

Enhancer - Grunge example

Enhancer - Default example

Enhancer - Painterly example

To use built-in presets click Built-in on the Preset Thumbnails panel The thumbnails

display with a label describing the preset Click the desired thumbnail to reresh the pre-

view image and view the results

You may also access custom presets that you have saved when adjusting your images

(reer to Saving Custom Presets below or more inormation on how to save these) To

use the custom presets click My Presets on the Preset Thumbnails panel

To toggle the orientation o the Preset Thumbnails panel between horizontal and

vertical select Toggle Preset Thumbnails Orientation rom the View menu To toggle

display o the Preset Thumbnails panel select View Preset Thumbnails rom the View

menu

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 17: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 13

If you save the preset in the default

location (which is the Presets folderof the Photomatix Pro application)

the preset is automatically added

to the Presets combo-box list andalso shows on the ldquoMy Presetsrdquo tabof the Preset Thumbnails Panel

Saving Custom Presets

There are two ways to save custom presets as an XMP le or uture use

during the image adjustment phase or ater Tone Mapping or Exposure

Fusion is complete

To save custom presets during image adjustment

1 In the Adjustments panel click the Presets drop-down list

2 Select Save Settings rom the list

3 Enter a name or the preset in the File name eld and click Save

To save the processing selections as a preset ater Tone Mapping or Expo-

sure Fusion processing

1 Click Save Settings rom the Workfow Shortcuts bar or select Save

Settings rom the File menu A dialog prompts or the le name

2 Enter the le name and click OK

33 Tone Mapping Details Enhancer Settings

General Settings

bull Strength Controls the strength o the contrast enhancements Move the slider

right or let to change the setting A value o 100 gives the maximum increase

in both local and global contrast enhancements The deault value is 70

bull Color Saturation Controls the saturation o the RGB color channels The

greater the saturation the more intense the color Move the slider right or let

to change the setting A value o 0 produces a grayscale image The value a-

ects each color channel equally The deault value is 46

bull Luminosity Controls the compression o the tonal range which has the efect

o adjusting the global luminosity level Move the slider to the right to boostshadow details and brighten the image Move it to the let to give a more

ldquonaturalrdquo look to the resulting image The deault value is 0

bull Microcontrast Sets the how much local details are amplied A higher value

gives a sharper look The deault value is 0

bull Smoothing Controls smoothing o the contrast variations throughout the

image This setting has an important inuence on the look o the tone mapped

image High values give a more ldquonaturalrdquo look low values a more ldquoarticialrdquo or

ldquopainterlyrdquo look

bull Light mode Smoothing is available in two modes The deault mode is a slider

I the slider is not visible uncheck Light mode in the Smoothing section TheldquoLightrdquo mode takes the orm o labeled buttons and can be accessed by check-

ing ldquoLight moderdquo The efect on the image difers depending on the mode The

ldquoLightrdquo mode tends to produce a more ldquosurrealrdquo efect Note that a diferent

algorithm is used depending on the mode

Tone Mapping Details

Enhancer General Settings

Note

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 18: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 14

Tone Settings

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedTheBlackPointslidersetsthevaluefor

theminimumofthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis025for

theWhitePointsettingand0fortheBlackPointsetting

bull Gamma Adjusts the mid-tone of the tone mapped image brightening or

darkening the image globally The default value is 10

Color Settings

bull Temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the tone mapped image rela-

tive to the temperature of the HDR source image Move the slider to the right

to give a warmer more yellow-orange colored look Move the slider to the

left for a colder more bluish look A value of 0 (default) preserves the original

color temperature of the HDR source image

bull Saturation Highlights Adjusts the color saturation of the highlights relativeto the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

0 increase the color saturation in the highlights Values lower than 0 decrease

it The default value is 0

bull Saturation Shadows Adjusts the color saturation of the shadows relative to

the color saturation set with the Color Saturation slider Values higher than

zero increase the color saturation in the shadows Values lower than zero

decrease it The default value is 0

Miscellaneous Settings

bull Micro-smoothingSmootheslocaldetailenhancementsThishastheeectofreducingnoiseintheskyforinstanceandtendstogivea

ldquocleanerrdquolooktotheresultingimageThedefaultvalueis2

Important note The Loupe may not properly show the eect o the Micro-

smoothing setting when the area magnifed is uniorm I you want to see

the eect o the Micro-smoothing setting at 100 resolution on a uniorm

area such as the sky you will have to select an area that contains an object

in the scene in addition to the sky

bull Highlights SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

highlightsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchofthehighlights

rangeisaectedThiscontrolisusefulforpreventingwhitehighlights

fromturninggreyoruniformlightblueskiesbecomingdarkblue-greyItisalsousefulforreducinghalosaroundobjectsplacedagainstbright

backgroundsThedefaultvalueis0

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Miscellaneous Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Color Settings

Tone Mapping Details Enhancer

Tone Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 19: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 1929

Photomatix Pro User Guide 15

34 Tone Mapping Tone Compressor Settings

bull BrightnessAdjuststheoverallbrightnessofthetonemappedimage

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Tonal Range CompressionControlsthecompressionofthetonalrangeMovetheslidertotherighttoshiftbothshadowsandhighlights

towardthemid-tonesinthetonemappedimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull Contrast AdaptationAdjuststheinuenceoftheaveragebrightness

inrelationtotheintensityoftheprocessedpixelMovetheslidertothe

righttocreatemorepronouncedcolorsMovetheslidertotheleftto

createamoreldquonaturalrdquolookThedefaultvalueis0

bull White Point ndash Black PointBothsliderscontrolhowtheminimumand

maximumvaluesofthetonemappedimagearesetMovingthesliders

totherightincreasesglobalcontrastMovingthemtotheleftreduces

clippingattheextremesTheWhitePointslidersetsthevalueforthe

maximumofthetonemappedimage(purewhiteorlevel255)The

BlackPointslidersetsthevaluefortheminimumofthetonemapped

image(pureblackorlevel0)Thedefaultvaluesare0

bull TemperatureAdjuststhecolortemperatureofthetonemappedim-

agerelativetothetemperatureoftheHDRsourceimageMovethe

slidertotherightforawarmermoreyellow-orangecoloredlookMove

ittotheleftforacoldermorebluishlookAvalueof0(default)pre-

servestheoriginalcolortemperatureoftheHDRsourceimage

bull SaturationAdjuststhecolorsaturationofthetonemappedimage

ThegreaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorThevalueaects

eachcolorchannelequallyThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows SmoothnessReducesthecontrastenhancementsinthe

shadowsThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshadowsrangeis

aectedThedefaultvalueis0

bull Shadows ClippingThevalueoftheslidersetshowmuchoftheshad-

owsrangeisclippedThiscontrolmaybeusefultocutoutnoiseinthe

darkareaofaphototakeninalow-lightsituationThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm imageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseDetailsEnhancertakesinto

accountlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisuncheckedNotethatthis

optionisnotenabledwhentheimageisinportraitmodeastheoption

isintendedforpanoramas

Tone Mapping

Tone Compressor Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 20: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2029

Photomatix Pro User Guide 16

35 Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

bull AccentuationAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancements

Thedefaultvalueis0

bull Blending PointAdjuststheweightinggiventotheunderexposed

versusoverexposedimagesWhenyoumovetheslidertotheright

overexposedimagesarefavoredwhichhastheeectofbrightening

theimageThereverseapplieswhenyoumovetheslidertotheleft Thedefaultvalueis0

bull ShadowsAdjuststhebrightnessoftheshadowswithoutaectingthe

highlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueof0produc-

esagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull White ClipSpecieshowmuchthehighlightsareclippedMovethe

slidertotherighttoincreasecontrastandremovedetailsinthebright-

esthighlightsThedefaultvalueis0

bull Black ClipSpecieshowmuchtheshadowsareclippedMovetheslidertotherightincreasecontrastbutremovedetailsinthedarkest

shadowsThedefaultvalueis0

bull MidtonePositivevaluesbrightentheimagebutreducetheoverall

contrastNegativevaluesdarkentheimagebutincreaseoverallcon-

trastThedefaultvalueis0

bull 360ordm ImageCheckingthisoptioneliminatestheseambetweenthe

leftandrightsidesofapanoramaviewedina360ordmpanoramicviewer

TheseamwouldotherwiseshowbecauseFusionAdjusttakesintoac-

countlocalcontrastassigningdierenttonalvaluestotherightand

leftpartsoftheimageThedefaultvalueisunchecked

36 Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

bull StrengthAdjuststhestrengthoflocalcontrastenhancementsThe

defaultvalueis0

bull Color SaturationAdjuststhesaturationofthecolorchannelsThe

greaterthesaturationthemoreintensethecolorAvalueofzeropro-

ducesagrayscaleimageThedefaultvalueis0

bull RadiusControlstheareausedtocalculatetheweightingofthesource

imagesAhigherradiusreduceshalosbutsignicantlyincreasespro-

cessingtimesThedefaultvalueis40

Exposure Fusion Adjust Settings

Exposure Fusion Intensive Settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 21: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2129

Photomatix Pro User Guide 17

4 Automating with Batch Processing

Use batch processing to automatically process image les The batch processing tool saves time processing many

images Photomatix Pro ofers two diferent batch modes

bull Batch Bracketed Photos Processes bracketed sets using HDR Tone Mapping andor Exposure Fusion all in

one step which can save you a lot o time when you have many series o photos to process

bull Batch Single Photos Processes single image les using Tone Mapping

41 Batch Processing Bracketed Photos

This section describes batch processing photos taken under multiple exposure settings

411 Using Batch Processing

To batch process photos select Batch Processing rom the Automate menu or click Batch Processing rom the

Workfow Shortcuts panel To batch process series o bracketed photos do the ollowing

1 Click the checkboxes on the let side o the window to select how the images should be processed

2 Select the number o exposures to combine using the pull-down menu below the checkboxes For example

select ldquo3rdquo i your bracketed shots consist o three exposures each such as when you have taken or each scene

one photo at median exposure one underexposed and one overexposed

Batch Processing of bracketed photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 22: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2229

Photomatix Pro User Guide 18

3 In the Source area select the older where the bracketed photos are located The les are arranged in

alphabetical order N les at a time are processed with N being the number specied in the previous step

4 To save the results in a dierent older than the older containing the source photos select the Custom

location option in the Destination area at the bottom right o the window

5 Accept the deault o Created under source older to create a subolder with the name PhotomatixResults

in the source image older

6 In the Destination area select the output le type7 Click Run to start batch processing

While the batch is running the results display in the area below the Run button

The term ldquolinearrdquo may have adifferent meaning depending on

the RAW converter For examplein Adobe Camera RAW linear is

relative to the Adobe RGB colorspace and not to the values of lightTherefore do not select this option

with les converted with Photoshop

or Lightroom

Note

412 Batch Processing Settings

Use the Settings buttons to access HDR generation Tone Mapping and Ex-

posure Fusion settings Reer to Sections 3 and 4 or a description o these

settings

The ollowing settings or generating HDR images are specic to batch

processingbull Force Exposure Values spacing to Forces the EV spacing to the speci-

ed value This option can be used when the exposure inormation is

not available in the EXIF data i two or more images have the same

exposure inormation or to orce the EV spacing in all cases In the lat-

ter case the exposure inormation in the EXIF data is ignored

bull Source images are linear (no tone curve applied) Intended or

16-bit TIFF les that have been converted rom RAW les with a RAW

converter that allows the image to be let in linear space Very ew

RAW converters allow this so only check this option i you are sure that

the tonal values o the images are linear relative to the values o light

captured

bull Process strip by strip Check this option i the source images are large

TIFF les With this option the HDR image le is created in several pass-

es processing and loading only one strip o each image into memory

at a time One strip is composed o a limited number o rows set to not

exceed approximately 512 MB o RAM This option is particularly useul

when processing large panoramas Note though that the alignment

unctions are not accessible when the ldquoProcess strip by striprdquo option is

used

Generate HDR image settings

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 23: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2329

Photomatix Pro User Guide 19

All of the subfolders must be

contained in the main parent folderfor this option to work properly

Note

413 Batch Processing Subfolders

When your bracketed series are located in multiple olders they can all be

processed in one run provided they are in subolders o the same parent

older To batch process multiple subolders check the Process subfolders

option at bottom o the Source rame on the Batch Processing dialog and

select sequentially When ldquoProcess subfolders sequentiallyrdquo is selected

the batch will process the bracketed image fles in one subolder and then

move on to the next subolder all o which are contained in the mainparent older

Processing Series of Photos with Varying Numbers of Exposures

When your bracketed sets are composed o varying numbers o exposures you can use ldquoProcess subfolders

sequentiallyrdquo to combine the exposures in these sets in one batch run Place each set in a separate subolder

group the subolders under a parent older select Process subfolders sequentially and select All rom the pull-

down menu or the number o images to process at one time

Grouped by Exposures Option

I you are processing bracketed photos that will be part o a panorama you may fnd it useul to be able toorganize your photos in such a way that all exposures o the same levels are in the same older Letrsquos take as an

example a panorama composed o our views that need to be stitched with each view having been taken under

three exposures -2 0 +2 You will then have 12 photos and may need to place them in three separate subolders

composed o our photos each as ollows

bull Subfolder1 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV -2

bull Subfolder2 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV 0

bull Subfolder3 contains the our photos or the panorama taken at EV +2

I you check ldquoProcess subfoldersrdquo and select ldquogrouped by exposuresrdquo the batch will combine the frst fle o

Subfolder1 with the frst fle o Subfolder2 and the frst fle o Subfolder3 The batch will then combine the second

fle o Subfolder1 with the second fle o Subfolder2 and the second fle o Subfolder3 and so on or the third andourth fle o each subolder

414 Advanced Options

The ollowing items are accessed when you click Advanced and click

Options to confgure automatic selection o bracketed image fles

Click Automatically detect the number of bracketed frames when

processing a older that contains fles in addition to those in the set

o bracketed rames or when the number o rames in the set varies

Photomatix Pro uses the metadata rom the image fles to perorm

automatic detectionbull Speciy a range using the two drop-down lists to automatically detect

the number o bracketed rames

bull Move the Maximum time between two bracketed frames slider right

or let to allow more or less time (read rom the metadata) Min is frac12

second and max is 64 seconds

Advanced batch processing options

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 24: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2429

Photomatix Pro User Guide 20

Click Select only part of the frames in bracketed set to load only selected rames rom a bracketed set

bull Speciy the total number o rames in each set using the drop-down list

bull Select the specic rames to process rom the list Select more than one le by holding down the Ctrl key

and clicking on the desired rames

42 Batch Processing Single Image Files

Photomatix Pro supports processing o single image les using tone mapping

The Batch Single Files feature

is intended for automating theprocessing of a lot of photos Toprocess a single image le load the

image le using the information in

Section 3 and Section 4

Note

To batch process single image les

1 Click Batch Single Files rom the Workfow Shortcut bar

or select Batch Single Files rom the Automate menu

2 To select the source older that contains the les click

Select Folder

3 Navigate to the older that contains the les and click OK

Photomatix Pro displays the olderpath and the les in

the older

4 To narrow down the les to process i needed hold down

the Ctrl key and click the les to process

5 To process using the details enhancer click Tone Map

with Details Enhancer Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

6 To process using the tone compressor click Tone Map

with Tone Compressor Click Settings to customize how

the les are processed

7 Click the checkboxes or noise and CA correction i

needed8 To select a destination older click Created under Source

Folder to save the images in the same older as the

source les

OR

Click Customized Location to save the images in a di-

erent older Click Choose to select the destination

folder Photomatix Pro displays the older location

9 For JPG le output select the quality rom 0 to 100 rom

the drop-down list with 100 yielding the largest le size

10 Click Run The batch processing status displays

Batch Tone Mapping on Single Photos

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 25: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2529

Photomatix Pro User Guide 21

To remove the watermark

Photomatix Pro requires that theimage was not retouched after the

watermark was added to it If thebrightness or contrast of the imagewas changed or the image was

cropped or resized then Photomatixwill not be able to remove the

watermark

5 Tips and Techniques

This section provides tips for working with images in Photomatix Pro More

tips and techniques and regularly updated information can be found on

the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsoft website at httpwwwhdrsoft

comsupportfaq_photomatixhtml

51 Integrating Lightroom with Photomatix ProYou can export photos for processing in Photomatix Pro directly from

Lightroom and reimport them back into the Lightroom library

The Lightroom Export plug-in to Photomatix is free and included with the

Photomatix Pro package Please refer to the HDRsoft website at http

wwwhdrsoftcomdownloadlrpluginhtmlfor installation instructions

and a short tutorial showing how to use the Lightroom export plug-in for

HDR processing in Photomatix Pro

52 Processing RAW fles in Third-Party RAW

ConvertersWhen using a third-party RAW converter develop the RAW images with the

following settings As an example the screenshots show the settings in

Lightroom

Note

Working with curves in LightroomBasic Settings in Lightroom

bull White Balance Use the same white balance for all source photos

bull Basic settings Set all to zero It is particularly important to set the

Blacks setting to zero

bull Curves Parametric and Point Curves should be linear

bull Details Set the Sharpening Amount to zero

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 26: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2629

Photomatix Pro User Guide 22

53 Dealing with Noise

When you process your photos using Exposure Fusion the used image will tend to show less noise than the

source images This is because Exposure Fusion works by directly combining your bracketed photos thus

averaging out noise However when you create a 32-bit HDR image your bracketed photos are assembled in

linear space into an image that spans the ull range o luminance values captured by the camera I the lightest

photo o your exposure sequence is not bright enough to expose the shadows o the scene then the noise in

the source photographs will be transerred to the HDR image Noise in the HDR image will then be made more

apparent by tone mapping especially with Details Enhancer as this tone mapping method increases local details

Though Photomatix Pro includes options to reduce noise it is still always better to avoid noise at capture time as

much as possible There are two tips to ensure a low noise level

bull Tip 1 Set a low ISO setting (ISO 100 or lower) whenever possible

bull Tip 2 Overexpose suciently ensuring that the lightest image o your exposure sequence has its shadows in

the mid-tones

54 Photomatix Pro and Color Management

Photomatix Pro supports color management even i RAW les are processed You should use the same working

space in Photomatix Pro as you use in other image editors (eg Photoshop)Photomatix supports the three most popular working spaces

bull sRGB Use i the images are created only or the web

bull Adobe RGB Popular working space or printing i extremely saturated colors are not used

bull ProPhoto RGB Wide gamut working space This should never be used or 8-bit images

For all JPEG and TIFF les Photomatix Pro preserves the color spaces o the source les

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 27: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2729

Photomatix Pro User Guide 23

(Automatic Exposure Bracketing) DSLR cameras and some compact digital cam-

eras oer this eature It enables you to automatically take three or more expo-

sures in a row one at the proper exposure one or more underexposed and one

or more overexposed

In Aperture Priority mode you select the aperture and the camera determinesthe correct shutter speed or the available light The shutter speed also depends

on ISO sensitivity This is the right mode or shooting bracketed shots or HDR

(reer to Section 1 or more inormation)

Bits represent digital data in computers Digital Images are made o bits A bit

depth corresponds to 2^(Bit Depth) levels (eg 256 or 8-bit)

The number o bits a le type uses to represent a pixels color at a given location

in an image

A group o photos taken with the Automatic Exposure Bracketing unction o a

camera resulting in photos o the same scene taken with dierent exposures

As the lens ocuses dierent wavelengths slightly dierently chromatic aberra-

tion occurs For example the purple ringing you oten nd around edges (leaves

in ront o a bright sky)

Another way to describe the dynamic range o a scene The ratio between the

darkest and brightest areas

Digital Single Lens Refex camera

In the context o HDR photography the total range o light in a scene rom the

deepest shadows to the brightest highlights

The Exchangeable Image File header contains inormation about the image the

camera location date and time and camera settings

The amount o light that enters a camera or the length o time the shutter is

open Exposure depends on aperture and shutter speed as well as the camerarsquos

sensitivity to light (controlled by the ISO) An exposure is also shorthand or a

photograph or rame (reers to a rame o lm)

Combination o photos o the same scene taken under dierent exposure set-

tings in such a way that highlight details are taken rom the underexposed pho-tos and shadows details rom the overexposed ones

A measure o exposure which is the equivalent o a stop In the absolute sense

EV is dened as the exposure rom a photo taken at 1 second 1 and ISO 100

In the relative sense the correct exposure is normally 0 EV and any deviation is

measured in positive or negative EV rom that mark

Glossary

AEB Mode

Aperture Priority

Bit

Bit Depth

Bracketed images

Chromatic Aberration

Contrast Ratio

dSLR

Dynamic Range

EXIF

Exposure

Exposure Fusion

EV (Exposure Value)

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 28: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2829

Photomatix Pro User Guide 24

High Dynamic Range

Strictly speaking an HDR image is an intermediary image with 32 bits per color

channel (96 bits per pixel) An HDR image is the result o merging photos o the

same scene taken under dierent exposure settings and stored in special HDR

image ormat The 32-bit intermediary HDR image must be processed with tonemapping or proper display on standard monitors and prints It has become

very common to dene HDR image as the result o processing the 32-bit HDR

image with tone mapping ie the tone mapped output but this is not techni-

cally correct

Histograms represent brightness distribution in digital images They help evalu-

ate correct exposure The y-axis represents the amount o pixels and the x-axis

represents the brightness value

A common image le ormat with two primary strengths ndash a relatively small le

size and universal compatibility JPEGs use a lossy compression scheme and

should not be edited and re-saved

Statistical variations inherent in the sensor system cause noise Noise is always

present but higher sensitivities and smaller sensors usually generate more

noise

Digital pictures consist o pixels the smallest units Each pixel has a color that

can be represented by 8 or 16 bit or as a foating-point number (32bit HDR)

Pixels per Inch Can be used to describe the actual pixels per inch o a print O-

ten conused with DPI (Dots per Inch) used by color printers to print an image

A le containing the raw data rom the camera sensor RAW les do not have a

color prole or other stylistic preerences permanently applied

A comprehensive image ormat that oers lossless compression schemes or

smaller le sizes with higher quality This ormat is suitable or editing and

printing but not publishing on the Web

Processing a 32-bit HDR image into an image that can be properly viewed on

monitors and prints

HDR

HDR Image

Histogram

JPEG

Noise

Pixel

PPI

RAW File

TIFF

Tone Mapping

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml

Page 29: PhotomatixProManual

842019 PhotomatixProManual

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullphotomatixpromanual 2929

Resources

You can nd more tips techniques and regularly updated inormation in the Photomatix Pro FAQ on the HDRsot

website at httpwwwhdrsotcomsupportaq_photomatixhtml